- All categories
Welcome to Wikbeauty
Main menu
-
SHOP All
-
Shop by Category
- Shop by Category
-
Body Contouring & Fat Reduction
-
Facial & Skin Rejuvenation
-
Recovery & Circulation Therapy
-
Bestsellers
Your cart
Product Comparison
Describe you product comparison grid
|
__ __ |
|
|---|---|
| Vendor |
Vendor - __ |
| SKU |
SKU - __ |
| Description |
Description - __ |
| Customizable title |
Customizable title - __ |
| Variant name |
Variant name - __ |
|
|
Compare products ( / )
All Product collection
All Product collection
Transform Every Treatment
From fat reduction to facial rejuvenation, our professional-grade equipment is built to elevate every service on your menu, giving clients real results and your business a competitive edge.
74 products
74 products
Sort by:
- Featured
- Most relevant
- Best selling
- Alphabetically, A-Z
- Alphabetically, Z-A
- Price, low to high
- Price, high to low
- Date, old to new
- Date, new to old
$1,199.00
Professional 5-in-1 Body Sculpting and Skin-Rejuvenation System Ultrasonic Cavitation, Radiofrequency, Vacuum, LED, and Massage Technology The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device is a professional 5-in-1 beauty system that combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum therapy, LED light, and massage functions on one platform. The machine is available with either a 30K or 40K cavitation configuration. Its five specialized treatment handles support customizable body-contouring, skin-tightening, facial-rejuvenation, and vacuum-massage programs. With adjustable treatment settings, an intelligent touchscreen, pre-programmed protocols, universal 110V–240V power compatibility, and a 30kg professional design, the machine is suitable for beauty salons, spas, and body-contouring clinics. 30K or 40K cavitation | Five beauty technologies | Five specialized handles | Universal voltage | Three-year warranty Five Professional Technologies on One Platform
Ultrasonic Cavitation
The cavitation function delivers ultrasonic energy to selected body areas as part of a professional body-contouring program. Customers can choose between: 30K cavitation operating at 30,000Hz 40K cavitation operating at 40,000Hz Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Waistline treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Upper-arm contouring Localized body-shaping treatments Radiofrequency
Radiofrequency energy provides controlled thermal stimulation within the selected treatment area. The machine includes different RF handpieces for facial and body applications. Common applications include: Facial skin tightening Body skin-firming treatments Collagen-remodeling programs Fine-line and wrinkle care Improved skin texture Post-cavitation skin tightening Vacuum Therapy
The adjustable vacuum function provides controlled suction for professional body massage and contouring programs. Common applications include: Vacuum massage Tissue mobilization Cellulite-appearance programs Body-contouring support Lymphatic-style beauty treatments Post-treatment massage LED Light Therapy
Integrated LED light can be incorporated into suitable facial and body-care programs. Common applications include: Skin-rejuvenation treatments Facial beauty programs Skin-comfort support Combined RF and LED treatments Post-treatment skincare programs Multipolar RF Massage
Multipolar RF handpieces combine controlled thermal energy with professional massage movements across selected treatment areas. Common applications include: Facial firming Upper-arm tightening Leg skin treatments Abdomen and waist programs Buttock and thigh treatments General skin-texture improvement Select the Right Program for Each Client Body-Contouring Program
Uses the selected 30K or 40K cavitation handpiece for targeted body treatments. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Waistline shaping Thigh treatments Buttock-area contouring Upper-arm programs Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized body areas Clients seeking non-invasive body contouring Clients following balanced wellness programs Skin-Tightening Program
Uses the appropriate radiofrequency handpiece to provide controlled thermal stimulation. Recommended applications: Loose-looking body skin Reduced facial firmness Upper-arm skin tightening Abdomen and waist firming General collagen-remodeling programs Recommended for: Clients seeking firmer-looking skin Clients combining cavitation and RF Clients receiving age-management beauty treatments Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the smaller tripolar RF handpiece and suitable LED settings for controlled facial treatments. Recommended applications: Facial skin tightening Fine-line care Texture improvement Facial collagen support General anti-aging treatments Recommended for: Clients concerned about early signs of aging Clients seeking non-invasive facial care Clients requiring a smaller treatment applicator Vacuum-Massage Program
Uses adjustable suction and controlled massage movements on suitable body areas. Recommended applications: Body massage Tissue mobilization Cellulite-appearance programs Lymphatic-style beauty treatments Combined body-contouring services Recommended for: Clients receiving multi-stage body treatments Clients seeking massage-based body care Clients combining vacuum with cavitation or RF Adjustable Cavitation, RF, and Vacuum Settings
The machine allows professionals to personalize treatments according to the selected technology, treatment area, and client comfort. Settings should be adjusted progressively according to client comfort, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waist
The cavitation, RF, vacuum, and massage functions can be incorporated into customized midsection treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdomen contouring Waistline shaping Skin-firming support Vacuum massage Combined cavitation and RF treatment Buttocks and Thighs
Larger treatment handles support structured lower-body contouring and skin-care programs. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock-area contouring Inner-thigh treatments Outer-thigh treatments Cellulite-appearance programs Skin-firming and massage Face, Arms, and Legs
Smaller and medium-sized multipolar RF handles support treatments for additional facial and body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Facial rejuvenation Upper-arm contouring Arm skin tightening Leg treatments General skin-texture improvement Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment objectives, target areas, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Technology and Handle Selection
Choose the 30K or 40K cavitation function, appropriate RF handpiece, vacuum setting, LED function, or combined treatment sequence. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the selected treatment area and apply the correct treatment medium when required. Configure the machine according to the area and client comfort. Step 4: Active Treatment
Move the selected handpiece continuously according to the supplied protocol. Monitor the client’s skin response, temperature, suction level, and comfort throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the treatment medium, inspect and clean the treated area, record the selected settings, and provide appropriate aftercare recommendations. Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device combines five complementary beauty technologies within one professional platform. Key advantages include: Choice of 30K or 40K ultrasonic cavitation Five integrated beauty technologies Five specialized treatment handles Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable 1–10MHz RF frequency Monopolar and multipolar RF configurations Adjustable vacuum pressure Integrated LED light Professional massage function Intelligent touchscreen controls Pre-programmed treatment protocols Approximately 20–40-minute sessions 30kg professional system Universal 110V–240V power compatibility Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation main unit 1 × 30K or 40K cavitation handpiece 1 × Standard RF handpiece 1 × Tripolar RF facial handpiece 1 × Quadrupolar RF handpiece 1 × Hexapolar RF body handpiece Integrated vacuum function Integrated LED light function Intelligent touchscreen control system Pre-programmed treatment protocols 1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable Standard machine accessories The selected 30K or 40K cavitation configuration should be confirmed when placing the order. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions 30K or 40K cavitation guidance RF handpiece-selection guidance Vacuum-treatment protocols Facial treatment protocols Body-contouring protocols Client-consultation materials Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use all five technologies safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening 30K or 40K cavitation operation Treatment-handpiece selection RF frequency and energy adjustment Vacuum-pressure adjustment LED and massage functions Facial treatment protocols Body-contouring protocols Combined treatment sequences Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Consumable accessories and components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated according to the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Active cancer or tumors Active infection or inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Serious liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Reduced or impaired skin sensation Recent surgery within the treatment area Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Cavitation should not be applied over the heart, head, neck, breasts, bones, joints, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Facial treatments should only use suitable facial handpieces and settings. The cavitation handpiece should not be used on the face. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and accessories before use. Select the correct handpiece for the treatment area. Begin with conservative energy and vacuum settings. Keep cavitation and RF handpieces moving during treatment. Use the correct treatment medium where required. Monitor skin response and client comfort. Avoid prohibited anatomical areas. Do not leave an active handpiece stationary on the skin. Clean and disinfect reusable handpieces after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Beauty salons Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Wellness centers Skin-rejuvenation studios Professional spas Aesthetic treatment facilities Home-based beauty businesses Professional operators should review local licensing, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device? Choice of 30K or 40K Cavitation
Businesses can select the cavitation frequency that best matches their preferred treatment protocols and service requirements. Five Technologies on One Platform
Cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum, LED, and massage functions support a broad range of facial and body treatments. Five Specialized Treatment Handles
Different handpiece configurations support treatments for the face, arms, abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs. Customizable Professional Settings
Adjustable RF frequency, vacuum pressure, treatment programs, and different handpiece configurations allow professionals to personalize each session. Complete Professional Support
The package includes step-by-step training, treatment guidance, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device?
It is a professional 5-in-1 beauty system combining ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum therapy, LED light, and massage functions. Can I choose between 30K and 40K cavitation?
Yes. The machine is available with either a 30K or 40K cavitation configuration. The selected option should be confirmed when placing the order. What is the difference between 30K and 40K?
The specified difference is the ultrasonic frequency. The 30K configuration operates at 30,000Hz, while the 40K configuration operates at 40,000Hz. Treatment selection should follow the appropriate professional training and protocol. How many treatment handles are included?
The package includes five specialized handles: one selected cavitation handpiece and four RF handpiece configurations. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, upper arms, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, and legs. The correct handpiece and protocol must be selected for each area. How long does one treatment take?
A typical session takes approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the treatment area, selected technologies, and treatment sequence. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied information indicates that visible changes may be noticed after three to five sessions. Individual outcomes vary, and the final treatment plan should be personalized following consultation. Can cavitation and RF be used in the same program?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive cavitation followed by RF as part of a combined body-contouring and skin-firming program. What does the vacuum function do?
The adjustable vacuum function provides controlled suction and massage for suitable body areas. It can be incorporated into body-care, cellulite-appearance, and combined-treatment programs. Can the machine be used for facial treatments?
Yes. The smaller tripolar RF handpiece and suitable LED function can support professional facial treatments. The cavitation handpiece should not be used on the face. What does a treatment feel like?
Cavitation may produce an audible sensation, RF creates controlled warmth, and vacuum produces suction. Settings should remain within a comfortable and professionally monitored range. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities following a suitable treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, or sensitivity may occur depending on the selected technology and intensity. Are results guaranteed?
No. Outcomes vary according to the treatment area, body composition, skin condition, number of sessions, lifestyle, selected settings, and individual response. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers cavitation, RF, vacuum, LED, massage, handpiece selection, treatment protocols, client screening, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 5-in-1 Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device enables salons, spas, and beauty clinics to provide customizable body-contouring, facial-rejuvenation, skin-tightening, and vacuum-massage services using one professional platform. Five key benefits: Choice of 30K or 40K ultrasonic cavitation Five complementary beauty technologies Five specialized facial and body handpieces Adjustable settings with universal 110V–240V power Professional training and a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cavitation configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Cavitation Option
30K or 40K
Selected ultrasonic body-contouring configuration
30K Frequency
30,000Hz
Professional cavitation treatments
40K Frequency
40,000Hz
Professional cavitation treatments
RF Frequency
1–10MHz adjustable
Facial and body thermal treatments
RF Configurations
Monopolar, tripolar, quadrupolar, and hexapolar
Different treatment areas
Vacuum Pressure
Adjustable
Personalized suction and massage
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Flexible treatment planning
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Protocol and setting management
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Technology
Face
Skin tightening and rejuvenation
Tripolar RF and LED
Upper Arms
Contouring and skin firming
Cavitation and quadrupolar RF
Abdomen
Body contouring and tightening
Cavitation, RF, and vacuum
Waist
Contour definition and massage
Cavitation, RF, and vacuum
Buttocks
Contouring and skin-firming support
Cavitation and hexapolar RF
Thighs
Body contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Cavitation, vacuum, and RF
Legs
Skin firming and massage
Quadrupolar RF and vacuum
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device
Technology
Cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum, LED, and massage
Cavitation Options
30K or 40K
30K Frequency
30,000Hz
40K Frequency
40,000Hz
RF Frequency Range
1–10MHz adjustable
RF Configurations
Monopolar, tripolar, quadrupolar, and hexapolar
Vacuum Pressure
Adjustable
Treatment Handles
Five
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Display
Intelligent touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Pre-programmed and adjustable
Treatment Areas
Face, arms, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, and legs
Weight
30kg
Power Supply
110V–240V
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
From $2,599.00
Professional 5D Lipo Laser System
Five-Wavelength Technology for Non-Invasive Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for beauty studios, wellness centers and qualified independent practitioners.
Combining five laser wavelengths with an adjustable multi-pad design, the system enables trained operators to create customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back and other commonly requested body areas.
Available in vertical and portable configurations, the machine provides a practical balance of treatment flexibility, operator control and client comfort.
Five wavelengths | Up to 14 pads | 15 energy levels | Vertical or portable
Advanced Five-Wavelength Technology
The system integrates five laser wavelengths within one professional platform:
-
650 nm
-
780 nm
-
808 nm
-
940 nm
-
980 nm
This multi-wavelength configuration provides greater versatility than a conventional single-wavelength system. Treatment parameters can be adjusted according to the selected area, professional protocol and individual client requirements.
Each treatment pad contains 28 diode lasers, depending on the configuration selected, with an output of up to 209 mW per diode.
Key Product Advantages Multi-Wavelength System
Five available wavelengths provide greater flexibility when developing professional body-contouring protocols. Adjustable Treatment Parameters
Fifteen energy levels, adjustable pulse timing and continuous or pulsed modes allow the operator to customize each session. Flexible Pad Configuration
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 treatment pads. Independent Pad Cooling
Each treatment pad features an independent wind-cooling system to support stable performance during operation. Multiple Equipment Formats
Choose a vertical unit for a permanent treatment room or a portable unit for smaller spaces and more flexible working arrangements. International Compatibility
The system is available in 110 V and 220 V versions, with US, UK, EU and AU plug options. Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The 5D Lipo Laser Machine is designed for non-invasive aesthetic treatments focused on improving the appearance of body contours. Common treatment areas include: Treatment suitability, pad placement and operating parameters should be determined by a trained operator following a complete client consultation. How the System Works
The treatment pads are positioned securely over the selected body area using adjustable straps. The operator then selects the treatment duration, energy level and pulse mode according to the recommended protocol. The pads deliver controlled low-level laser energy to the treatment area without surgical incisions, injections or anesthesia. Sessions are designed to be comfortable and generally do not require a surgical recovery period. The system should be used as part of a structured body-contouring program. Individual outcomes vary according to body composition, lifestyle, treatment frequency and the protocol applied. Configurable Treatment-Pad System Large Treatment Pads
The six large pads provide wider coverage for areas such as the abdomen, waist, back, thighs and buttocks. Small Treatment Pads
The two small pads are designed for more targeted placement on areas such as the upper arms and smaller localized zones. Optional Expansion
Selected machine configurations can support up to 14 pads. This provides additional flexibility when covering larger areas or developing multi-pad protocols. Additional treatment pads are sold separately. Compatibility should be confirmed before purchase. Vertical and Portable Options Vertical Configuration
The vertical model provides a refined, professional presentation for dedicated treatment rooms. Its mobile base allows the equipment to be repositioned within the working area when necessary. Recommended for: Beauty studios Aesthetic clinics Body-contouring centers Permanent treatment rooms Higher-volume treatment environments Portable Configuration
The portable model offers a more compact footprint while retaining the core multi-pad functionality of the system. Recommended for: Independent practitioners Smaller studios Limited treatment spaces Professionals requiring easier storage or transportation Controlled, Client-Focused Operation
The system offers adjustable parameters to support professional operation and individual client comfort. Energy adjustment from level 1 to 15 Pulse-time adjustment from 0.1 to 5 seconds Continuous and pulsed operating modes Adjustable session duration Touchscreen control interface Independent cooling for each pad Secure pad-positioning straps IC-card control system Treatment duration may range from approximately 15 to 60 minutes, depending on the selected area and treatment protocol. Technical Specifications Product specifications may vary according to the selected configuration. Confirm the final specification sheet with Wikbeauty before ordering. Standard Package Contents The standard package includes: One 5D Lipo Laser main unit Six large treatment pads Two small treatment pads Treatment-pad connection cables Adjustable securing straps Protective eyewear Power cable with selected plug English user manual Setup and operating guidance Optional pads and accessories can be added according to the selected system configuration. Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand: Equipment installation Basic system operation Treatment-parameter selection Pad positioning Routine cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Recommended safety procedures Intended Users
This system is designed for professional use by: Aesthetic practitioners Body-contouring specialists Beauty-studio owners Wellness professionals Trained independent operators Qualified entrepreneurs establishing a treatment business Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and suitability assessment should be performed before every treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Uncontrolled medical conditions Active skin infections Open wounds in the treatment area Photosensitivity or the use of photosensitizing medication Other conditions identified in the operating manual This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied user manual, relevant professional standards and applicable local regulations. Clients should seek medical advice when treatment suitability is uncertain. Why Professionals Choose Wikbeauty Specialized Beauty-Equipment Supply
Wikbeauty provides professional aesthetic and body-contouring equipment to international buyers. Configurable Equipment
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and number of treatment pads according to your operating requirements. International Electrical Options
The system can be prepared for different markets with 110 V or 220 V operation and the appropriate regional plug. Operating Assistance
Support is available for installation, initial setup, routine operation and basic troubleshooting. Direct Purchasing
Buy directly from the equipment supplier and receive assistance when confirming the most appropriate configuration. Frequently Asked Questions
Is this a professional or home-use machine?
This is professional beauty equipment. It should be operated by a trained individual who understands consultation procedures, contraindications, treatment parameters and equipment safety. What is the standard pad configuration?
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 pads. What is the difference between the large and small pads?
Large pads provide broader coverage for areas such as the abdomen, back and thighs. Small pads enable more targeted placement on the arms and other localized areas. Should I choose the vertical or portable version?
The vertical model is suitable for a dedicated professional treatment room. The portable model is better suited to smaller spaces or operators who require easier storage and transportation. How long does a session take?
A session may last approximately 15–60 minutes. Duration varies according to the treatment area, pad configuration, operating parameters and professional protocol. Is there a recovery period?
The treatment is non-invasive and does not involve surgical incisions. Clients can generally resume normal daily activities after a session, subject to individual circumstances and professional guidance. Are results guaranteed?
No aesthetic treatment can guarantee identical results for every person. Outcomes may vary depending on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment schedule and the protocol used. Can I order additional treatment pads?
Additional pads may be purchased for compatible configurations. Confirm the maximum number of supported pads before ordering. Which voltage should I select?
Select the voltage that matches the electrical standard in your country. If uncertain, contact Wikbeauty before completing your purchase. Configure Your 5D Lipo Laser System
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and treatment-pad configuration that best suits your professional requirements. For assistance choosing between the vertical and portable models, contact Wikbeauty before placing your order. Three-Year Warranty
Your Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing additional confidence in your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the warranty terms, coverage includes manufacturing defects and eligible failures involving: Main machine components Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Treatment-pad connections Other eligible parts supplied with the original machine Technical Support
If a covered technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty’s support team will help you: Identify the issue through remote technical assessment Complete basic troubleshooting Determine whether a replacement part or repair is required Receive guidance for installing eligible replacement components Warranty Conditions
The warranty applies to defects arising under normal and proper use. It does not cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse or incorrect operation Unauthorized modification or repair Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of consumable parts and accessories Damage caused during unauthorized transportation Failure to follow the supplied operating instructions The original order information and machine serial number may be required when requesting warranty service. Full coverage is subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty terms. Three years of warranty coverage. Professional technical assistance. Long-term confidence in your purchase. Select Your Configuration and Add to Cart Explore the complete range of professional lipo laser machines.
Treatment area
Typical application
Abdomen
Abdominal contouring
Waist and flanks
Waistline definition
Upper and lower back
Localized body contouring
Upper arms
Arm-contouring treatments
Inner and outer thighs
Thigh shaping
Buttocks
Contour-focused treatments
Legs and calves
Localized lower-body treatments
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 5D lipo laser machine
Technology
Low-level diode laser
Laser wavelengths
650 nm, 780 nm, 808 nm, 940 nm and 980 nm
Diode output
Up to 209 mW per diode
Diodes per pad
28 on big and 3 on a small pad
Standard configuration
6 large pads and 2 small pads
Maximum configuration
Up to 14 treatment pads
Energy adjustment
Levels 1–15
Pulse-time range
0.1–5 seconds
Operating modes
Continuous and pulsed
Treatment duration
Approximately 15–60 minutes
Cooling system
Independent wind cooling for each pad
Control interface
Touchscreen
Additional control
IC-card system
Equipment options
Vertical or portable
Voltage options
110 V or 220 V
Plug options
US, UK, EU and AU
Receives in 7 days.
$1,599.00
Professional 7D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound for Skin Tightening, Facial Lifting, and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is a professional non-invasive aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments. High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Its multi-depth cartridge system supports customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas. With multiple treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm, seven treatment cartridges, adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and a compact portable design, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and professional skincare facilities. 7D HIFU technology | 1.5–16mm treatment depths | Seven cartridges | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Different cartridges allow professionals to target superficial, middle, and deeper tissue levels. Common applications include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line and wrinkle care Jawline contouring Neck and décolletage treatments Body skin-firming programs Professional body-contouring treatments Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
Facial cartridges are designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at depths suitable for different layers of facial tissue. Common applications include: Reduced facial firmness Fine lines and wrinkles Lower-face laxity Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatments Neck skin tightening Body Contouring and Skin Firming
Deeper cartridge configurations support professional treatments for suitable body areas. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Cellulite-appearance improvement Select the Right Program for Each Client Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Reduced facial firmness Uneven-looking skin texture Early signs of aging General collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation Clients concerned about visible signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition. Recommended applications: Lower-face laxity Reduced jawline definition Jowl-area treatments Double-chin concerns Neck skin tightening Recommended for: Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face Clients concerned about facial contours Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized body areas Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program. Recommended applications: Facial-lifting maintenance Skin-firming maintenance Body-contour maintenance Continued collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Returning HIFU clients Clients completing an initial treatment plan Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine provides multiple treatment depths for different facial and body applications. The supplied product information describes a seven-cartridge package while listing treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm. The exact included cartridge configuration should be confirmed when placing the order. Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face, Chin, and Jawline
Facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable areas of the face. Common treatment objectives include: Facial lifting Fine-line care Wrinkle reduction Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatment Neck and Décolletage
Suitable cartridge depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs. Common treatment objectives include: Neck skin tightening Reduced appearance of neck lines Improved-looking firmness Décolletage rejuvenation Collagen-stimulation support Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Abdomen treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin firming Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance. Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance. Designed for Professional Beauty Environments The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with a compact professional design. Key advantages include: Professional 7D HIFU technology Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm Seven-cartridge package configuration Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable energy settings Intelligent touchscreen controls Approximately 30–60-minute sessions Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs Jawline and chin contouring Neck and décolletage treatments Body-contouring and skin-firming programs Compact and portable construction 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU main unit 1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece Seven treatment cartridges according to the selected package Facial treatment cartridge configurations Body treatment cartridge configurations Intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories The exact seven-cartridge combination should be confirmed before ordering because the supplied information lists eight available treatment depths. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Facial treatment protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Facial and body assessment Treatment-area mapping Cartridge selection Energy-level adjustment Handpiece positioning Facial-lifting protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Post-treatment care Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Active skin infection Herpes, open wounds, or sores Active eczema, psoriasis, or dermatitis in the area Severe or recent sunburn Recent surgery within the treatment area Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments Serious cardiovascular or medical conditions Reduced or impaired skin sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. An appropriate waiting period should be determined by a qualified practitioner. HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use. Confirm the cartridge and depth before beginning treatment. Map the treatment area carefully. Apply sufficient ultrasound gel. Begin with conservative energy settings. Monitor client comfort and tissue response. Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas. Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol. Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring clinics Professional spas Anti-aging treatment centers Professional skincare facilities Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine? Multi-Depth HIFU Technology
Treatment depths spanning 1.5mm to 16mm support superficial facial treatments, deeper facial lifting, and selected body applications. Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the area and client. Compact Portable Design
The portable construction and intelligent touchscreen make the machine suitable for different treatment rooms and professional beauty environments. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments. What does 7D HIFU mean?
The product uses a multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to treat different facial and body tissue levels. The supplied package is described as containing seven treatment cartridges. Which treatment depths are available?
The supplied information lists depths of 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm. How many cartridges are included?
The package is described as including seven cartridges. Because eight treatment depths are listed in the supplied information, the exact included combination should be confirmed before ordering. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, chin, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. How long does one session take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and protocol. How many treatments are recommended?
The supplied information suggests one to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition, objectives, and professional assessment. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect following treatment. Progressive changes may continue as the skin’s natural collagen response develops. Individual outcomes and timing vary. How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response. Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur. What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as ultrasound energy is delivered. Energy should be adjusted according to professional protocol and client tolerance. Can this machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 7D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and skincare professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services using one professional platform. Five key benefits: Multi-depth focused ultrasound treatments from 1.5mm to 16mm Professional facial and body treatment capability Seven-cartridge package with adjustable energy settings Compact portable design with intelligent touchscreen controls CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, exact cartridge configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Treatment Depth
General Treatment Level
Possible Applications
1.5mm
Superficial facial tissue
Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas
3.0mm
Dermal facial layer
Collagen stimulation and skin tightening
4.5mm
Deeper facial layer
Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments
6.0mm
Shallow body treatment
Small body areas and skin-firming programs
8.0mm
Medium body treatment
Arms and selected body areas
10.0mm
Deeper body treatment
Abdomen, thighs, and body contouring
13.0mm
Deep body treatment
Larger body areas
16.0mm
Maximum listed body depth
Professional deep body-contouring protocols
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Depth Category
Face
Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care
1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm
Chin and Jawline
Contour definition and lower-face tightening
Suitable facial depth
Neck
Skin tightening and line care
Suitable facial depth
Décolletage
Texture and firmness improvement
Professionally selected depth
Upper Arms
Skin firming and contouring
Suitable body depth
Abdomen
Body contouring and tightening
Suitable deeper body depth
Thighs
Contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Suitable body depth
Buttocks
Skin-firming and contouring support
Suitable body depth
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Treatment Package
Seven multi-depth cartridges
Listed Treatment Depths
1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Facial Depths
1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm
Body Depths
6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Primary Functions
Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Treatment Frequency
Personalized according to client assessment
Energy Settings
Adjustable
Display
Intelligent touchscreen
Design
Compact and portable
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
From $2,699.00
Professional Muscle Sculpting and Body-Contouring System
Dual-Action Technology for Muscle Stimulation and Targeted Fat Reduction
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to combine intensive muscle stimulation with targeted fat-reduction treatments.
Advanced electrical muscle stimulation produces powerful involuntary muscle contractions, helping practitioners deliver muscle-conditioning and body-definition programs. Its integrated RF/energy technology simultaneously targets areas of localized fat, supporting a more toned and sculpted appearance.
With four specialized treatment applicators, adjustable frequency settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and pre-programmed protocols, the EMSZero provides customizable treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves.
2-in-1 muscle and fat treatment | Four applicators | 6000W power | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform Electrical Muscle Stimulation
Advanced EMS technology delivers controlled electrical energy to the targeted muscles, producing repeated involuntary contractions during the treatment. These contractions activate and engage the underlying muscles without requiring the client to perform conventional exercise during the session. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock toning and shaping Thigh muscle stimulation Arm definition programs Calf muscle conditioning General body-sculpting treatments Targeted RF/Energy Treatment
The integrated RF/energy function is designed to complement muscle stimulation by targeting areas where clients want to improve the appearance of localized fat and body contours. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Waistline shaping Thigh contouring Buttock definition Upper-arm shaping Targeted body-toning programs Simultaneous Muscle and Body-Contouring Treatment
EMSZero combines muscle stimulation and targeted fat-reduction energy in a single professional session. This enables practitioners to address both muscle tone and overall body shape using one system. The combined approach can be incorporated into personalized programs designed to support: Improved muscle definition A firmer-looking body contour Targeted body shaping Enhanced treatment efficiency Customized multi-area programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Conditioning Program
Designed to focus primarily on repeated muscle contractions and targeted muscle engagement. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock toning Arm muscle stimulation Thigh and calf conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved muscle definition Busy clients interested in assisted muscle stimulation Clients combining professional treatments with fitness programs Body-Contouring Program
Focuses on the appearance of localized fat and overall body shape in selected treatment areas. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Waistline shaping Thigh contouring Upper-arm shaping Recommended for: Clients with localized body-contouring concerns Clients seeking a firmer-looking silhouette Clients following a balanced wellness program Combined Muscle and Fat Program
Uses the machine’s dual-action functions to address muscle conditioning and body contouring during the same treatment program. Recommended applications: Abdominal sculpting Buttock shaping Thigh definition Arm contouring Full-body sculpting packages Recommended for: Clients seeking a comprehensive body-sculpting program Clients wanting to address muscle tone and body shape together Professional clinics offering premium combined treatments Maintenance Program
Designed to help clients maintain their body-contouring and muscle-conditioning programs after completing an initial treatment course. Recommended applications: Muscle-conditioning maintenance Body-contour maintenance Seasonal body-shaping programs Continued wellness support Recommended for: Returning body-contouring clients Clients who have completed six to eight sessions Clients combining treatment with exercise and healthy lifestyle habits Customizable Frequency and Treatment Settings The EMSZero system allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected body area, client comfort, and treatment objective. All settings should be selected according to professional consultation, client suitability, and individual tolerance. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waist
The applicators can be positioned over the abdominal area to support muscle conditioning, waistline definition, and a firmer-looking midsection. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Waistline shaping Core-area conditioning Improved abdominal definition Buttocks and Thighs
Treatments can be customized for the buttocks, inner thighs, outer thighs, and front or back of the legs. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock toning Thigh muscle conditioning Lower-body contouring Improved leg definition Arms and Calves
The specialized applicators can also be used for smaller muscle groups and targeted body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Biceps and triceps stimulation Calf muscle conditioning Targeted limb definition Professional Body-Contouring Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment goals, target areas, and potential contraindications. Explain the treatment experience and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the appropriate applicators and position them securely over the chosen treatment area. Placement should be adjusted according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objective. Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the treatment protocol, frequency, intensity, and session duration. Begin at a comfortable intensity and increase progressively according to client tolerance. Step 4: Active Treatment
The system delivers controlled muscle stimulation and the selected body-contouring energy for approximately 30 minutes. The client experiences strong, repeated muscle contractions during the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program automatically. The applicators are removed, and the practitioner provides any appropriate aftercare or treatment-plan recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The EMSZero 2-in-1 system combines versatile body-contouring functions with straightforward professional operation. Key advantages include: Two treatment functions on one platform Four specialized treatment applicators Adjustable 1–100Hz frequency range 6000W machine power Intelligent touchscreen controls Pre-programmed treatment protocols Automatic intensity control Temperature monitoring Automatic shut-off Universal 110V–240V power compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and technical support Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Body Sculpting Machine 4 × Specialized treatment applicators 1 × Intelligent touchscreen control system Integrated EMS muscle-stimulation function Integrated RF/energy body-contouring function Pre-programmed treatment protocols Adjustable 1–150Hz frequency controls 1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable Documentation and Training
English user manual Operating and safety guide Muscle-conditioning protocol guidance Body-contouring protocol guidance Combined-treatment protocol guidance Client consultation materials Treatment-plan templates Service-menu and package guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine includes professional operating guidance to help your team use the equipment confidently and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and program operation Client consultation and screening Correct applicator placement Frequency and intensity adjustment Muscle-conditioning protocols Combined body-contouring protocols Treatment safety and contraindications Routine cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty for dependable after-sales protection. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are provided for eligible warranty issues. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine must be operated according to the supplied manual and applicable local requirements. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active infection or inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery in the treatment area Serious muscle or neurological disorders Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning treatment. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 system is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Beauty salons Wellness centers Fitness and recovery studios Aesthetic practices Professional treatment facilities Operators should review local licensing, insurance, and treatment requirements before offering services. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1?
Two Functions on One Platform
The system combines muscle stimulation and targeted body-contouring energy, allowing practitioners to create more comprehensive treatment programs with one machine. Four Specialized Applicators
Four applicators support flexible placement across different body areas and allow clinics to design personalized treatments. Customizable Professional Settings
The adjustable 1–100Hz frequency range, intensity controls, and pre-programmed protocols support individualized muscle-conditioning and body-contouring sessions. Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can be used for the abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, and calves, expanding the range of services available to clients. Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine?
It is a professional body-contouring system that combines electrical muscle stimulation with targeted RF/energy technology to support muscle conditioning and body-shaping programs. How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment session takes approximately 30 minutes, depending on the target area and selected protocol. How many applicators are included?
The machine includes four specialized treatment applicators for different body areas and treatment objectives. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, buttocks, inner and outer thighs, upper arms, and calves. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends a course of six to eight sessions, generally scheduled once or twice per week. The final plan should be personalized following professional consultation. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. The intensity can be adjusted progressively according to individual tolerance and comfort. Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system does not require surgery, injections, incisions, or anesthesia. Can muscle stimulation and body contouring be performed together?
Yes. The dual-action system is designed to combine muscle stimulation and targeted body-contouring energy within one treatment program. Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. Practitioners can adjust the treatment intensity and frequency according to the selected body area, protocol, and client comfort. Can it be offered as a standalone service?
Yes. Clinics can offer EMSZero as a standalone body-sculpting treatment or combine it with compatible wellness and aesthetic services. Are results the same for every client?
No. Outcomes vary according to body composition, treatment consistency, lifestyle, selected settings, and individual response. Practitioners should provide realistic expectations during consultation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Operating guidance, treatment protocol instruction, safety training, and ongoing technical support are included. Add Professional Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine enables clinics, spas, and wellness centers to provide customizable muscle-conditioning and body-contouring services using one professional platform. Five key benefits: Dual-action muscle stimulation and body contouring Four specialized treatment applicators Multiple treatment areas and customizable protocols CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Machine Power
6000W
Professional system performance
Frequency Range
1–100Hz
Customizable muscle-stimulation programs
Treatment Applicators
Four
Multi-area body treatments
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Efficient clinic scheduling
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
One to two sessions weekly
Progressive treatment planning
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Protocol and intensity management
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Suitable Program
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Muscle or combined program
Waist
Improve the appearance of body contours
Body-contouring program
Buttocks
Toning, shaping, and muscle stimulation
Muscle or combined program
Thighs
Lower-body conditioning and contouring
Combined program
Upper Arms
Muscle stimulation and arm shaping
Muscle or combined program
Calves
Targeted muscle conditioning
Muscle-conditioning program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSZero 2-in-1 Muscle Sculpting Machine
Technology
Electrical Muscle Stimulation and RF/energy body contouring
Machine Power
6000W
Frequency Range
1–100Hz adjustable
Treatment Applicators
Four specialized applicators
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Recommended Frequency
One to two sessions per week
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Pre-programmed and customizable protocols
Safety Features
Automatic intensity control, temperature monitoring, and automatic shut-off
Power Supply
110V–240V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
Answer a few quick questions and we'll recommend the right Lipo Laser setup for you.
$1,129.00
Professional 5D 80K RF Cavitation and Vacuum System Multi-Function Technology for Body Contouring, Skin Tightening, and Facial Rejuvenation The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine is a professional beauty system developed for body contouring, skin tightening, facial rejuvenation, vacuum massage, and cellulite-appearance treatments. The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy. Its three specialized treatment handles support customized treatments for the face, neck, waist, abdomen, back, arms, and thighs. With an intelligent touchscreen, pre-programmed protocols, air-and-water circulation cooling, universal 110V–240V compatibility, and three different handle sizes, the system is suitable for beauty salons, spas, body-contouring clinics, and professional wellness facilities. 80K cavitation | 5D radiofrequency | Vacuum therapy | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Technologies on One Platform 80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The 80K cavitation function operates at 80,000Hz and delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas as part of a professional contouring program. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Waistline treatments Thigh contouring Upper-arm treatments Buttock-area programs Localized body-shaping treatments 5D Multipolar Radiofrequency
Multipolar RF energy provides controlled thermal stimulation within the selected treatment area. The three handle sizes support facial and body applications. Common applications include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line and wrinkle care Neck rejuvenation Body skin-firming programs Collagen-remodeling support Post-cavitation tightening treatments Adjustable Vacuum Therapy
The vacuum function provides controlled suction and massage through the selected RF handle. Common applications include: Vacuum massage Tissue mobilization Cellulite-appearance programs Body-contouring support Lymphatic-style beauty treatments Muscle-comfort massage Select the Right Program for Each Client Body-Contouring Program
Combines suitable cavitation, RF, and vacuum settings for targeted body areas. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Waistline shaping Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Buttock-area contouring Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized body areas Clients seeking non-invasive body contouring Clients combining treatments with healthy lifestyle habits Skin-Tightening Program
Uses multipolar RF energy and suitable vacuum settings to support controlled thermal treatments. Recommended applications: Loose-looking body skin Reduced facial firmness Upper-arm skin tightening Abdomen and waist firming General collagen-remodeling programs Recommended for: Clients seeking firmer-looking skin Clients combining cavitation and RF Clients receiving professional age-management treatments Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the small vacuum and RF handle for controlled treatments across suitable facial and neck areas. Recommended applications: Facial skin tightening Fine-line care Wrinkle-appearance treatments Neck rejuvenation General facial firming Recommended for: Clients concerned about early signs of aging Clients seeking non-invasive facial care Clients requiring a smaller treatment applicator Vacuum-Massage Program
Uses adjustable suction and controlled massage movements on suitable body areas. Recommended applications: Body massage Tissue mobilization Cellulite-appearance programs Lymphatic-style beauty treatments Combined body-contouring services Recommended for: Clients receiving multi-stage body treatments Clients seeking massage-based body care Clients combining vacuum with RF or cavitation Adjustable Cavitation, RF, and Vacuum Settings
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected area, client comfort, and professional protocol. Settings should be adjusted progressively according to client comfort, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face and Neck
The small vacuum and RF handle supports controlled treatments for smaller and more delicate areas. Common treatment objectives include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line care Neck rejuvenation Improved-looking firmness Facial massage Waist and Ribs
The medium vacuum and RF handle supports contouring and massage across medium-sized body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Waistline contouring Side-body treatments Vacuum massage Skin-firming support General body shaping Abdomen, Back, Arms, and Thighs
The large vacuum and RF handle supports treatments across larger body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Abdomen contouring Back treatments Upper-arm contouring Thigh programs Cellulite-appearance care Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment objectives, target areas, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Technology and Handle Selection
Choose the appropriate cavitation, RF, vacuum, or combined treatment sequence. Select the small, medium, or large handle according to the treatment area. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the selected area and apply the appropriate conductive treatment medium. Configure the machine according to the selected technology, treatment area, and client comfort. Step 4: Active Treatment
Move the treatment handle continuously according to the supplied protocol. Monitor the skin response, temperature, suction level, and client comfort throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the treatment medium, inspect and clean the treated area, document the selected settings, and provide appropriate hydration, skincare, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Beauty Environments The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine combines three complementary treatment technologies with specialized facial and body handles. Key advantages include: 80K ultrasonic cavitation 5D multipolar radiofrequency Adjustable vacuum therapy Three specialized treatment handles Small handle for the face and neck Medium handle for the waist and ribs Large handle for the abdomen, back, arms, and thighs Facial and body treatment capability Intelligent touchscreen controls Pre-programmed treatment protocols Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–40-minute treatments per area Universal 110V–240V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation main unit 1 × Small vacuum and RF handle 1 × Medium vacuum and RF handle 1 × Large vacuum and RF handle Integrated 80K cavitation function Integrated 5D RF function Integrated adjustable vacuum function Intelligent touchscreen control system Pre-programmed treatment protocols Conductive gel starter supply 1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions 80K cavitation guidance RF handle-selection guidance Vacuum-pressure guidance Facial treatment protocols Body-contouring protocols Combined treatment protocols Client-consultation materials Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use all three technologies safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening 80K cavitation operation Treatment-handle selection RF setting adjustment Vacuum-pressure adjustment Facial treatment protocols Waist and body protocols Combined treatment sequences Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Equipment cleaning Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Conductive gel, handle seals, tubing, filters, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Active cancer or tumors Active infection or inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Serious liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Reduced or impaired skin sensation Recent surgery within the treatment area Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Cavitation should not be applied over the heart, head, neck, breasts, bones, joints, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Facial treatments should only use the suitable small facial handle and professionally selected settings. The cavitation function should not be used on the face. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handles, cables, tubing, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Select the correct handle for the treatment area. Begin with conservative RF and vacuum settings. Keep active cavitation and RF handles moving during treatment. Use the correct conductive medium. Monitor skin response, temperature, suction, and client comfort. Avoid prohibited anatomical areas. Do not leave an active handle stationary on the skin. Record the treatment area and selected settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Beauty salons Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Wellness centers Skin-rejuvenation studios Professional spas Aesthetic treatment facilities Home-based beauty businesses Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine? Three Complementary Technologies
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy. Three Specialized Treatment Handles
Small, medium, and large handles support customized treatments for facial, waist, and body areas. Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, body contouring, vacuum massage, and cellulite-appearance programs. Professional Cooling and Controls
The intelligent touchscreen and air-and-water circulation cooling support efficient professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine?
It is a professional beauty system combining 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy. What does 80K cavitation mean?
The cavitation function operates at an ultrasonic frequency of 80,000Hz and is intended for professional body-contouring programs. Is 80K automatically better than 30K or 40K?
Different cavitation frequencies have different operating characteristics and treatment protocols. A higher frequency should not automatically be presented as deeper or more effective. Selection should follow the product design and professional training. How many treatment handles are included?
The machine includes three handles: small for the face and neck, medium for the waist and ribs, and large for broader body areas. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, waist, ribs, abdomen, back, upper arms, thighs, and buttocks. How long does one treatment take?
A typical treatment takes approximately 20–40 minutes per area, depending on the selected technology and protocol. Can cavitation, RF, and vacuum be combined?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive these functions as part of a structured treatment sequence. The order and settings should follow professional training. Can the machine be used for facial treatments?
Yes. The small vacuum and RF handle supports suitable facial and neck treatments. The cavitation function should not be used on the face. What does treatment feel like?
RF creates controlled warmth, vacuum produces suction and massage, and cavitation may produce an audible sensation. Settings should remain within a comfortable, professionally monitored range. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities following a suitable treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, sensitivity, or vacuum marks may occur. Are results guaranteed?
Outcomes vary according to the treatment area, body composition, skin condition, number of sessions, selected settings, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers 80K cavitation, RF, vacuum therapy, handle selection, treatment protocols, client screening, cooling-system maintenance, cleaning, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 5D 80K Body and Facial Treatments to Your Business The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine enables salons, spas, and beauty clinics to provide customizable body-contouring, facial-rejuvenation, skin-tightening, and vacuum-massage treatments. Five key benefits: 80K ultrasonic cavitation for professional body programs 5D multipolar RF with adjustable vacuum therapy Three specialized handles for the face, waist, and body Intelligent touchscreen controls with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Cavitation Frequency
80,000Hz
Ultrasonic body-contouring treatments
RF Technology
5D multipolar RF
Controlled facial and body heating
Vacuum Pressure
Adjustable
Personalized suction and massage
Treatment Handles
Three sizes
Face, waist, and larger body areas
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes per area
Flexible treatment planning
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Protocol and setting management
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous operation
Power Supply
110V–240V
International compatibility
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Handle or Technology
Face
Skin tightening and wrinkle-appearance care
Small vacuum and RF handle
Neck
Rejuvenation and skin-firming support
Small vacuum and RF handle
Waist and Ribs
Contouring and vacuum massage
Medium vacuum and RF handle
Abdomen
Body contouring and skin tightening
Cavitation and large RF/vacuum handle
Back
Body treatment and massage
Large vacuum and RF handle
Upper Arms
Contouring and skin firming
Cavitation and large RF/vacuum handle
Thighs
Contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Cavitation, RF, and vacuum
Buttocks
Contouring and skin-firming support
Large vacuum and RF handle
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine
Technology
80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar RF, and vacuum therapy
Cavitation Frequency
80,000Hz
RF Technology
5D multipolar radiofrequency
Vacuum Pressure
Adjustable
Treatment Handles
Three
Small Handle
Vacuum and RF for the face and neck
Medium Handle
Vacuum and RF for the waist and ribs
Large Handle
Vacuum and RF for the abdomen, back, arms, and thighs
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes per area
Display
Intelligent touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Pre-programmed and adjustable
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, ribs, waist, abdomen, back, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Power Supply
110V–240V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$499.00
Professional Vacuum BBL Body-Shaping System Non-Surgical Buttock Lifting, Breast Firming, and Cellulite Care The Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device is a professional, non-invasive body-shaping system designed to lift, firm, and enhance the natural appearance of the buttocks and breasts without surgery or implants. Using adjustable negative-pressure vacuum therapy and suction massage, the system supports blood circulation, lymphatic drainage, tissue stimulation, and natural contour enhancement. Multiple vacuum cups allow professionals to adapt treatments to different body shapes and treatment areas. Designed for slimming salons, spas, physiotherapy centers, wellness facilities, and aesthetic clinics, this professional BBL machine supports buttock lifting, breast firming, cellulite reduction, hip shaping, and thigh contouring through comfortable 20–40-minute sessions. Vacuum Therapy | Multiple Cup Sizes | Buttock and Breast Treatments | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform Vacuum Buttock Lifting
Professional vacuum cups create controlled suction around the buttocks to stimulate the tissue and support a fuller, firmer, and more lifted appearance. Common applications include: Non-surgical buttock lifting Buttock contour enhancement Improved shape and symmetry Natural-looking volume support Hip and buttock curve definition Breast Firming and Shaping
Different cup sizes allow professionals to adapt vacuum treatments to the client’s breast shape and treatment objectives. Controlled suction supports circulation and tissue stimulation for a firmer and more defined appearance. Common applications include: Breast-firming treatments Natural shape enhancement Improved contour and symmetry Tissue-stimulation programs Maintenance treatments Cellulite and Body-Contouring Therapy
Vacuum massage supports blood flow and lymphatic circulation in areas affected by uneven texture or cellulite. It can also be incorporated into professional thigh, hip, and buttock-contouring programs. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance reduction Thigh and hip contouring Skin-texture improvement Lymphatic massage support Smoother-looking body contours Select the Right Program for Each Client Buttock Lifting Program
A focused treatment program designed to improve the shape, firmness, symmetry, and lifted appearance of the buttocks. Recommended applications: Buttocks, lower buttock line, outer hips, and surrounding contour areas. Recommended for: Clients seeking a non-surgical BBL-style treatment with natural-looking contour improvement. Breast Firming Program
A controlled vacuum treatment designed to support breast firmness, shape, tissue stimulation, and overall contour. Recommended applications: Breast area using appropriately sized vacuum cups and carefully selected suction settings. Recommended for: Suitable clients seeking non-surgical breast-firming and shaping treatments. Cellulite-Smoothing Program
A suction-massage program focused on improving circulation and reducing the visible appearance of uneven skin texture. Recommended applications: Buttocks, hips, inner thighs, outer thighs, and other compatible areas affected by cellulite. Recommended for: Clients seeking smoother-looking skin and improved lower-body contours. Maintenance and Body-Shaping Program
A flexible follow-up program designed to support previously achieved lifting, firming, and contouring results. Recommended applications: Buttocks, breasts, hips, and thighs previously treated with vacuum therapy. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and want periodic maintenance sessions. Adjustable Vacuum and Treatment Settings Vacuum intensity must be selected gradually according to the client’s comfort, skin condition, treatment area, and professional protocol. Excessive suction can cause discomfort or temporary bruising and should be avoided. Adjustable Treatment Areas Buttock and Hip Areas
Different vacuum cups can be positioned across the buttocks and surrounding hip areas to support a more lifted and balanced silhouette. Treatment objectives include: Buttock lifting Natural contour enhancement Improved firmness Shape and symmetry support Hip and buttock curve definition Cellulite-appearance reduction Breast Area
Appropriately sized cups can be used for carefully controlled breast-firming and shaping programs. Treatment objectives include: Breast-firming support Natural shape enhancement Improved contour Tissue stimulation Symmetry support Maintenance of treatment results Thigh and Lower-Body Areas
Vacuum massage can be applied to compatible thigh and lower-body areas where cellulite, uneven texture, or reduced definition is present. Treatment objectives include: Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Cellulite-appearance improvement Smoother-looking skin Circulation and lymphatic support Improved lower-body proportions Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s goals, medical history, skin condition, previous procedures, and potential contraindications. Step 2: Body Assessment
Assess the intended treatment area and select the appropriate vacuum cups, suction level, session duration, and treatment protocol. Step 3: Cup Placement
Position the selected cups securely over the buttocks or breasts, or prepare the appropriate applicator for cellulite and body-contouring massage. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Begin with a low vacuum level and increase the intensity gradually according to client comfort and tissue response. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the cups carefully, inspect the treated skin, and provide appropriate hydration, lifestyle, massage, and maintenance recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine combines adjustable vacuum pressure, multiple cup sizes, and straightforward controls in one professional body-shaping platform. Key advantages include: Non-surgical body-shaping technology Adjustable negative-pressure suction Multiple cups for different body areas Buttock, breast, thigh, and hip applications Approximately 20–40-minute sessions Customized 6–10-session treatment courses Digital touchscreen or knob operation 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications Treatment experiences, session requirements, and visible outcomes may vary according to the client’s anatomy, tissue condition, lifestyle, treatment frequency, selected vacuum settings, and adherence to aftercare recommendations. Results should not be presented as guaranteed or equivalent to surgical enhancement. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device Multiple vacuum cups in different sizes Compatible vacuum tubing and connectors 1 × Compatible power cable Standard machine accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Setup and operating guide Vacuum-cup placement instructions Treatment-protocol guidance Safety and contraindication information Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional training support Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers use the vacuum BBL system correctly and confidently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Vacuum-cup selection Correct cup positioning Vacuum-intensity adjustment Buttock-lifting protocols Breast-firming protocols Cellulite and body-contouring treatments Client consultation and contraindication screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Treatment-course planning Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising under normal operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before repair assistance or replacement parts are provided. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting guidance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a clear description of the technical issue. Submit photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the machine. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect machine operation Excessive or unsuitable vacuum settings Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper electrical installation or voltage Water damage or unsuitable storage conditions Failure to follow cleaning and maintenance instructions Normal wear of tubing, cups, seals, and other consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A complete client consultation and contraindication assessment should be performed before treatment. The machine must be used only by trained operators following the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting or bleeding disorders Current anticoagulant medication Severe varicose veins in the treatment area Active infection or inflammation Open wounds, rashes, or damaged skin Recent surgery in the intended treatment area Breast implants or other implants without professional clearance Undiagnosed breast lumps or breast-health concerns History of thrombosis Uncontrolled diabetes Reduced skin sensation Severe skin fragility Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with breast-related concerns, implants, previous surgery, or unexplained symptoms should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a consultation before the client’s first treatment. Inspect the machine, tubing, connectors, and cups before use. Clean and disinfect all reusable applicators properly. Select the correct cup size for the treatment area. Begin treatment at a low vacuum level. Increase suction gradually according to client comfort. Never use excessive suction to accelerate results. Monitor the skin continuously during treatment. Stop treatment if unusual pain, severe redness, dizziness, or discomfort occurs. Do not apply vacuum over open wounds or inflamed skin. Avoid prolonged stationary suction unless specified by the protocol. Do not exceed the recommended session duration. Release the vacuum before removing treatment cups. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Keep accurate treatment records when required. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine is suitable for: Body-contouring clinics Beauty salons Slimming centers Aesthetic clinics Wellness centers Day spas and medical spas Physiotherapy centers where locally permitted Professional massage and body-shaping providers Users should complete appropriate training, follow the supplied operating instructions, and comply with local rules governing aesthetic and vacuum-therapy equipment. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine? 1. Multi-Application Vacuum Therapy
One professional platform supports buttock lifting, breast firming, cellulite care, thigh contouring, and hip shaping. 2. Multiple Vacuum Cup Sizes
Different cup sizes help professionals accommodate varying body shapes and create more customized treatment programs. 3. Adjustable Treatment Intensity
The vacuum level can be adapted according to the treatment area, tissue condition, and client comfort. 4. Non-Surgical Body Shaping
The system offers a non-invasive alternative for suitable clients seeking natural-looking contour enhancement without implants or surgical downtime. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates, professional operating guidance, after-sales technical support, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the Wikbeauty Vacuum BBL Machine work?
The system uses vacuum cups and controlled negative pressure to stimulate the treatment area, support circulation, mobilize tissue, and improve the appearance of firmness and shape. Q: What treatments can the machine provide?
The machine supports buttock lifting, breast firming and shaping, cellulite care, hip contouring, thigh treatments, and vacuum massage. Q: Is this a surgical BBL procedure?
No. This is a non-surgical vacuum body-shaping treatment. It does not involve fat transfer, anesthesia, incisions, or implants. Q: Can vacuum therapy produce the same results as surgery?
No. Vacuum therapy may support temporary, natural-looking lifting and contour improvement, but it should not be presented as producing the same degree or permanence of change as surgery. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally experience a pulling or suction-massage sensation. Comfort varies, and the vacuum intensity must be adjusted according to the client’s tolerance. Q: How long does one session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the selected area and protocol. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course generally includes approximately 6–10 sessions. The final recommendation should be based on the client’s condition and goals. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice a temporary lifting or plumping effect after a session. More developed contouring results generally require a structured treatment course, and individual outcomes vary. Q: Which areas can be treated?
The primary treatment areas are the buttocks, breasts, thighs, and hips. Q: Can the machine help improve the appearance of cellulite?
Yes. Vacuum massage can support circulation and improve the appearance of uneven skin texture on the buttocks, hips, and thighs. Q: Can different cup sizes be used?
Yes. The machine includes multiple vacuum cups designed to accommodate different body areas, shapes, and treatment requirements. Q: Is there downtime after treatment?
Most suitable clients do not require a formal recovery period. Temporary redness, tenderness, or mild bruising may occur depending on suction intensity and individual sensitivity. Q: How long do the results last?
Result duration varies. Maintenance sessions, regular exercise, balanced nutrition, hydration, and stable body weight may help support the appearance of the treated areas. Q: Is the treatment suitable for clients with breast implants?
Clients with breast implants or previous breast surgery should obtain clearance from a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Q: Can two areas be treated during the same appointment?
Compatible areas may be incorporated into the same appointment when supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol. Q: Is vacuum therapy suitable for every client?
No. Each client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine setup, cup selection, applicator placement, treatment settings, safety, contraindications, cleaning, and basic maintenance. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Q: What is included in the package?
The package includes the main machine, multiple vacuum cups, compatible tubing and connectors, a power cable, operating documentation, training guidance, standard accessories, and a warranty card. Add Professional Vacuum BBL Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device gives salons, spas, wellness facilities, and aesthetic clinics a versatile platform for non-surgical buttock lifting, breast firming, cellulite care, and lower-body contouring. Five key benefits: Professional vacuum therapy and suction massage Multiple cup sizes for customized treatments Adjustable intensity for different body areas Buttock, breast, hip, and thigh applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Vacuum Intensity
Adjustable negative pressure
Allows suction strength to be adapted to the treatment area and client comfort
Treatment Mode
Vacuum therapy and suction massage
Supports lifting, shaping, cellulite care, and circulation-focused treatments
Cup Size
Multiple cup sizes
Accommodates different body shapes and treatment objectives
Treatment Area
Buttocks, breasts, thighs, and hips
Enables customized body-shaping protocols
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Supports targeted and comprehensive treatment programs
Treatment Course
Approximately 6–10 sessions recommended
Provides a structured course for progressive contouring results
Control System
Digital touchscreen or knob controls
Enables convenient adjustment of treatment settings
Power Compatibility
110V/220V
Supports professional use in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Non-Surgical BBL Treatment
Buttocks
Support a fuller, firmer, and more lifted appearance
Buttock Contouring
Buttocks and lower buttock line
Improve shape and overall definition
Hip Shaping
Hips and outer buttocks
Create smoother and more balanced curves
Breast Firming
Breast area
Support firmness and natural contour
Breast Shaping
Breast area
Improve the appearance of shape and symmetry
Cellulite Care
Buttocks, hips, and thighs
Reduce the visible appearance of uneven texture
Thigh Contouring
Inner and outer thighs
Support smoother and more defined contours
Vacuum Massage
Compatible body areas
Support circulation and tissue stimulation
Lymphatic Support
Buttocks, thighs, and hips
Promote professional drainage-focused treatments
Maintenance Treatments
Previously treated areas
Help maintain lifting and shaping results
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Vacuum Butt and Breast Enlargement Device
Alternative Name
Professional Vacuum BBL Machine
Technology
Vacuum therapy and suction massage
Primary Functions
Buttock lifting, breast firming and shaping, cellulite reduction, and body contouring
Applicators
Multiple vacuum cups in different sizes
Treatment Areas
Buttocks, breasts, thighs, and hips
Vacuum Level
Adjustable according to treatment area and client comfort
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 6–10 sessions
Display and Controls
Digital touchscreen or knob controls
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$2,599.00
Professional Four-Handle HIEMT PRO Body-Sculpting System
Dual-Client Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Multi-Area Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is a professional body-sculpting system developed for simultaneous muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Advanced High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its four-handle configuration supports multi-area treatment for one client or simultaneous treatment for two suitable clients.
With adjustable energy settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, dual-client operation, and combined air-and-water cooling, the PRO system is designed for premium clinics, medical spas, body-sculpting studios, fitness centers, resort spas, and high-volume wellness facilities.
Advanced HIEMT | Four ergonomic handles | Dual-client operation | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HIEMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy, treatment objectives, and selected protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen treatments
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Customized four-area programs
Dual-Client Operation
The four-handle configuration can be arranged to treat one client across multiple areas or two suitable clients simultaneously.
Common benefits include:
-
Single-client multi-area treatments
-
Simultaneous dual-client sessions
-
Flexible applicator allocation
-
Improved treatment-room efficiency
-
Customized treatment programs
-
High-volume clinic operation
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for bilateral lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Multi-Area Body Program
Uses all four applicators for one client across multiple suitable treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Abdomen and arms
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Customized four-area treatment
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning
-
Clients with multiple treatment objectives
-
Premium body-sculpting clients
Dual-Client Program
Divides the four applicators between two appropriately screened clients.
Recommended applications:
-
Two-client abdomen programs
-
Simultaneous lower-body treatments
-
Independent client protocols
-
High-volume treatment scheduling
-
Professional dual-client services
Recommended for:
-
Clinics with appropriate staffing
-
High-volume body-sculpting facilities
-
Premium spas and wellness centers
Each client must receive an individual consultation, screening, treatment plan, applicator placement, and continuous professional monitoring.
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO allows practitioners to customize treatments according to the selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | Advanced HIEMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area or dual-client treatments |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Treatment Capacity | One or two suitable clients | Flexible professional operation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Multiple handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support balanced lower-body treatments across suitable buttock and thigh muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Multiple Body Areas
Four handles allow professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Simultaneous arm and abdomen treatment
-
Simultaneous thigh and buttock treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Two or more handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
| Dual Clients | Simultaneous independent treatment programs | Handles divided between two clients |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review each client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. During dual-client operation, each client must receive individually assessed applicator placement.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy levels. Adjust the settings according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: HIEMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor every client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO combines multi-area and dual-client performance with professional controls and continuous-operation cooling.
Key advantages include:
-
Advanced HIEMT technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Single-client multi-area capability
-
Simultaneous dual-client capability
-
Focused and bilateral treatment configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO |
| Designation | PRO professional configuration |
| Technology | High-Intensity Electromagnetic Technology |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 |
| Treatment Capacity | One client across multiple areas or two suitable clients |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, simultaneous, bilateral, or dual-client |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Results Timeline | Supplied estimate: visible changes in 2–4 weeks and progressive changes over 6–12 weeks |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures and timelines are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO main unit
-
4 × Ergonomic HIEMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Single-client multi-area protocols
-
Dual-client treatment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Single-client multi-area operation
-
Dual-client treatment setup
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review must be completed for every client before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Complete separate screening for every client.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Continuously monitor every client during dual-client operation.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Luxury wellness facilities
-
Resort spas
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness centers
-
Slimming centers
-
High-volume treatment facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIEMT or dual-client treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
Advanced HIEMT Technology
The system provides approximately 30,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four handles support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and suitable dual-client treatment programs.
Flexible Dual-Client Operation
The applicators can be divided between two appropriately screened clients, providing additional scheduling flexibility for high-volume facilities.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes machine training, dual-client guidance, applicator-placement protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO?
It is a professional HIEMT body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, multi-area body conditioning, and suitable dual-client operation.
What does the PRO designation mean?
PRO identifies this product as the supplied advanced four-handle configuration with approximately 30,000 contractions, a 12-inch touchscreen, dual-client capability, and air-and-water cooling.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four ergonomic HIEMT treatment handles.
Can all four handles be used on one client?
Yes. All four handles can be positioned across suitable treatment areas according to the client’s individual treatment plan.
Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
Yes. The four handles can be divided between two suitable clients. Each client requires individual screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can HIEMT replace regular exercise?
HIEMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
The supplied information indicates that visible changes may begin within two to four weeks and continue developing over six to twelve weeks. Individual results vary.
What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied product information lists potential muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The system uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, multi-handle placement, dual-client protocols, energy adjustment, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Advanced Dual-Client HIEMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim HIEMT Four-Handle PRO enables premium clinics, resort spas, wellness centers, and body-sculpting professionals to provide multi-area or simultaneous dual-client muscle-conditioning treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Advanced HIEMT with approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Four ergonomic handles for multi-area treatment
-
Flexible single-client or dual-client operation
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 7 days.
$999.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Recovery System
Four Treatment Heads for Muscle Relaxation and Professional Wellness Programs
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is a professional percussion and oscillation therapy system developed for spas, wellness centers, gyms, recovery studios and physiotherapy clinics.
Its adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow trained operators to create different protocols for muscle relaxation, post-workout recovery, circulation support and general wellness.
Four treatment-head options allow the operator to select the size and treatment pattern that best match the target area and professional service.
Four treatment heads | 5Hz–100Hz adjustable frequency | Full-body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Treatment Heads on One Professional Platform Small Treatment Head
The small treatment head is designed for precise applications and smaller muscle areas. Its concentrated treatment pattern allows the operator to work accurately on localized areas requiring controlled vibration. Common treatment areas include: Forearms Hands Feet Calves Small shoulder areas Localized muscle groups Medium Treatment Head
The medium treatment head is designed for general massage and recovery treatments. It provides balanced coverage for common muscle groups and medium-sized treatment areas. Common treatment areas include: Arms Shoulders Neck muscles Lower legs Upper back General muscle groups Large Treatment Head
The large treatment head provides broader coverage for larger muscle areas. It is suitable for professional treatments requiring efficient vibration across wide treatment zones. Common treatment areas include: Back Thighs Gluteal muscles Hamstrings Quadriceps Larger body areas Flexible Treatment Head
The flexible treatment head is designed to adapt to body contours and areas requiring a more adaptable treatment surface. Common treatment applications include: Curved body areas General relaxation Broad muscle groups Body-contour massage Wellness treatments Customized full-body protocols The appropriate treatment head should be selected according to the target area, muscle condition, client comfort and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Head for Each Service
The system supports four treatment heads. The appropriate option should be selected according to the size of the treatment area, required intensity and intended wellness application. Option 1: Small Treatment Head
A precision-focused attachment for localized muscle groups and smaller treatment areas. Recommended applications: Localized muscle tension Hands and feet Calves and forearms Precision recovery treatments Recommended for: Targeted wellness protocols Smaller muscle areas Detailed massage services Localized vibration treatments Option 2: Medium Treatment Head
A versatile attachment for general massage, relaxation and recovery programs. Recommended applications: Arms and shoulders Upper-back treatments Lower-leg treatments General muscle relaxation Recommended for: Spa massage services Wellness programs General recovery treatments Regular maintenance sessions Option 3: Large Treatment Head
A broad-coverage attachment for larger muscle groups and body areas. Recommended applications: Back treatments Thigh and leg treatments Gluteal muscles Athletic recovery programs Recommended for: Gyms and recovery centers Sports-wellness businesses Full-body massage services High-volume professional treatments Option 4: Flexible Treatment Head
An adaptable attachment for curved body areas and customized wellness protocols. Recommended applications: Contoured body areas Broad relaxation treatments Flexible full-body protocols General massage services Recommended for: Professional spas Wellness centers Customized treatment programs Businesses offering varied massage services Adjustable Frequency for Customized Vibration Treatments
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz. Each frequency and intensity setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective. The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with a lower frequency and intensity before either setting is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Different treatment heads and frequency settings support different professional applications. Upper-Body Treatments
Back Shoulders Arms Forearms Suitable neck muscles Upper-body recovery programs Lower-Body Treatments
Thighs Hamstrings Quadriceps Calves Gluteal muscles Feet Full-Body Wellness Treatments
General muscle relaxation Post-workout recovery Circulation support Fatigue-relief programs Stress-reduction services Maintenance-oriented wellness sessions Professional Recovery and Wellness Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected treatment head, frequency, intensity and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every professional treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, target muscle groups, comfort level and treatment goals. The appropriate treatment head, frequency and intensity are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The selected treatment head is installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure before beginning the session. 3. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, session duration and treatment pattern are selected according to the target area and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the treatment head to the selected muscle groups using light to moderate pressure and controlled movement. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the client receives suitable hydration, recovery and aftercare guidance. Some clients may return to their normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary tenderness, sensitivity, tingling or muscle fatigue may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital controls with adjustable percussion and oscillation technology for streamlined use in professional settings. Key operating advantages include: Digital control display Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range Customizable intensity settings Four treatment-head options Percussion and oscillation technology Full-body treatment capability Quiet operation below 70dB Lightweight and portable design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment heads and the required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One G8 Vibration Massage Machine One small treatment head One medium treatment head One large treatment head One flexible treatment head Treatment-head connection components Power cable Rechargeable battery where included with the selected model English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Treatment-head installation instructions Frequency-selection guidance Intensity-adjustment guidance Treatment-protocol information Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Treatment-head installation Digital-control operation Frequency adjustment Intensity selection Treatment-area planning Client positioning Basic wellness and recovery protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is supported by a three-year parts and labor warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital display and control system Original treatment heads Treatment-head connection components Original power components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-head operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of treatment heads and external components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration-massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active or suspected blood clots Severe cardiovascular conditions Acute inflammation or infection Open wounds in the treatment area Recent fractures Recent surgery Severe osteoporosis Bleeding disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Severe nerve impairment Reduced sensation Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The machine should not be applied directly over the front or side of the neck, eyes, head, spine, kidneys, open wounds, recent injuries or other prohibited areas. The selected frequency, intensity and pressure must remain comfortable throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Wellness centers Gyms and fitness facilities Sports-recovery centers Physiotherapy clinics Massage professionals Corporate wellness providers Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their recovery services This machine is not intended for unsupervised use by untrained individuals. Why Choose the G8 Vibration Massage Machine? Select the Appropriate Treatment Head
Four treatment-head options allow practitioners to select the appropriate coverage and treatment pattern for different muscle groups and body areas. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional treatments for the back, shoulders, arms, legs, thighs, calves, feet and other suitable muscle groups. Customize Every Session
The adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The machine can support muscle-relaxation services, athletic-recovery programs, general wellness treatments and suitable add-on massage services. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts and labor warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is vibration massage therapy?
Vibration massage uses controlled percussion and oscillation movements to stimulate selected muscle groups. The frequency and intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort. What is the adjustable frequency range?
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz. What is the difference between the four treatment heads?
The small head supports precise treatments, the medium head supports general massage, the large head provides broad coverage, and the flexible head adapts to curved body areas. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable treatment areas include the back, shoulders, arms, forearms, thighs, legs, calves, gluteal muscles, hands and feet. How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes. Treatment time varies according to the target area, frequency, intensity and professional protocol. Is vibration massage uncomfortable?
The frequency and intensity are adjustable. Clients should feel controlled vibration and muscle stimulation without pain. The operator should reduce the settings or stop treatment if discomfort occurs. Can the machine support athletic recovery programs?
Yes. The G8 Machine can be incorporated into professionally planned pre-workout activation, post-workout relaxation and general sports-recovery programs. Can it be offered as an add-on service?
Yes. Short vibration-massage sessions may be added to suitable massage, body-care, fitness and wellness services. Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts and labor warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine combines: Four professional treatment heads Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency Percussion and oscillation technology Full-body recovery and wellness applications Three-year warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment heads, frequency settings and professional training. Order Your G8 Vibration Massage Machine and Request a Quote
Frequency Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Frequency
Gentle relaxation and comfort-focused treatments
Moderate Frequency
General muscle massage and wellness programs
Higher Frequency
Muscle stimulation and recovery-oriented treatments
Customized Frequency
Professional protocols for specific muscle groups
Treatment Area
Applicable Treatment Head
Intended Wellness Application
Back
Large or flexible head
Broad muscle relaxation
Shoulders
Small or medium head
Localized tension support
Arms and forearms
Small or medium head
General massage and recovery
Thighs and legs
Medium or large head
Post-workout recovery
Calves
Small or medium head
Tired-muscle relaxation
Gluteal muscles
Large or flexible head
Broad recovery treatment
Hands and feet
Small head
Targeted relaxation
Full body
Multiple heads
Customized wellness program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine
Product Type
Professional vibration massage and recovery system
Technology
Percussion and oscillation vibration therapy
Frequency Range
5Hz–100Hz adjustable
Power Output
50W–150W
Treatment Heads
Small, medium, large and flexible
Session Duration
Approximately 15–20 minutes
Treatment Areas
Back, legs, arms, shoulders, neck muscles, feet and other suitable muscle groups
Control Interface
Digital frequency and intensity controls
Noise Level
Less than 70dB
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature control, intensity limits and overload protection
Power Supply
110V–240V
Portability
Lightweight design with cordless option available
Warranty
Three-year parts and labor warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
Buy 2+ machines and save up to 15% — get a personalized quote within 24 hours.
$3,999.00
Professional Cryolipolysis Fat-Freezing System Controlled Cooling Technology for Non-Invasive Fat Reduction and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for controlled fat-freezing treatments across multiple body areas. Cryolipolysis uses precisely controlled cooling to target suitable subcutaneous fat tissue. The treated fat cells undergo a gradual biological response and are processed by the body over the weeks following treatment. With adjustable temperatures from 5°C to −15°C, multiple applicator sizes, intelligent touchscreen controls, real-time temperature monitoring, and universal 110V–240V compatibility, the machine is suitable for slimming clinics, beauty salons, medical spas, and wellness centers. Controlled cryolipolysis | 5°C to −15°C cooling | Multiple applicators | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform Controlled Cryolipolysis Cooling
The machine delivers controlled cooling to suitable areas of subcutaneous fat while the skin is protected by an antifreeze membrane. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Waist and flank contouring Upper-arm treatments Inner- and outer-thigh programs Back-fat treatments Suitable submental-area treatments Vacuum Applicator Technology
The treatment applicator uses suction to draw suitable tissue into the cooling chamber and maintain consistent contact during treatment. Common benefits include: Secure tissue positioning Targeted cooling delivery Different applicator sizes Customized anatomical coverage Stable treatment contact Professional treatment consistency Intelligent Temperature and Safety Control
The machine combines adjustable cooling with real-time monitoring and automatic protection features. Common features include: Adjustable cooling temperature Real-time temperature monitoring Pre-programmed treatment protocols Automatic shut-off Antifreeze membrane protection Intelligent touchscreen controls Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdomen and Waist Program
Uses an appropriately sized applicator for suitable abdominal, waist, or flank tissue. Recommended applications: Upper-abdomen treatments Lower-abdomen treatments Waistline contouring Flank and love-handle areas General midsection programs Recommended for: Clients with suitable pinchable subcutaneous fat Clients seeking non-invasive midsection contouring Clients with stable and realistic treatment goals Arms and Back Program
Uses a small or medium applicator for suitable upper-arm, underarm, back, or bra-line tissue. Recommended applications: Upper-arm contouring Underarm-area treatments Upper-back treatments Lower-back contouring Bra-line programs Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized upper-body areas Clients suitable for controlled cooling Clients seeking targeted body contouring Thigh and Buttock Program
Uses an appropriate applicator for suitable inner-thigh, outer-thigh, or lower-buttock areas. Recommended applications: Inner-thigh contouring Outer-thigh treatments Upper-leg body contouring Lower-buttock fold treatments Bilateral lower-body programs Recommended for: Clients with suitable thigh-area tissue Clients seeking lower-body contouring Clients receiving bilateral treatment plans Submental and Maintenance Program
Uses a suitable small applicator for professionally assessed submental areas or provides additional treatments following reassessment. Recommended applications: Double-chin-area contouring Small localized areas Follow-up treatment after assessment Multi-area treatment planning Long-term body-contouring support Recommended for: Clients with suitable submental tissue Clients completing an initial treatment Clients requiring professionally assessed follow-up care Adjustable Cooling and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the applicator, body area, tissue condition, and client tolerance. Temperature, suction, and treatment duration should be selected according to the applicator, tissue thickness, skin condition, client response, and supplied protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen, Waist, and Flanks
Different applicator sizes support controlled cooling across suitable midsection areas. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-abdomen contouring Lower-abdomen contouring Waistline definition Love-handle treatments General midsection shaping Arms, Back, and Buttocks
Suitable applicators can be selected for localized upper-body and posterior body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Bra-line treatments Upper- and lower-back areas Lower-buttock fold treatments Localized body shaping Thighs, Legs, and Double Chin
Small, medium, or specialized applicators support professionally assessed lower-body and submental treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Inner-thigh contouring Outer-thigh treatments Upper-leg shaping Double-chin-area contouring Bilateral body treatments Professional Treatment Applications Applicator availability and final configuration depend on the selected machine package. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, body-contouring objectives, target areas, previous procedures, skin condition, and possible contraindications. Confirm that the selected area contains suitable tissue for cryolipolysis. Step 2: Area and Applicator Selection
Mark the treatment area and select the applicator that best matches the tissue size, shape, and anatomical location. Step 3: Skin Protection and Placement
Apply an approved antifreeze membrane correctly over the complete treatment area. Position the applicator and adjust the suction according to the supplied protocol. Step 4: Controlled Cooling Treatment
Begin the selected cooling program for approximately 30–60 minutes. Monitor the temperature, applicator seal, skin condition, and client comfort throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the applicator and protective membrane, inspect the skin, and perform the recommended post-treatment massage when appropriate. Document the settings and provide aftercare guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine combines adjustable cooling, multiple applicator options, and intelligent safety controls. Key advantages include: Professional cryolipolysis technology Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C Multiple applicator sizes Treatments for several body areas Intelligent digital touchscreen Pre-programmed treatment protocols Real-time temperature monitoring Antifreeze membrane protection Automatic shut-off Approximately 30–60-minute sessions Universal 110V–240V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes because individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis main unit Multiple cooling applicators according to the selected package Applicator connection hoses Applicator-positioning accessories Intelligent digital touchscreen Pre-programmed treatment protocols Antifreeze membranes and gel starter supply 1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card The exact number, size, and shape of included applicators should follow the selected machine configuration. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Applicator-selection guidance Cooling-temperature guidance Suction-adjustment guidance Body-area treatment protocols Submental-treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Aftercare instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Tissue and treatment-area assessment Applicator selection Correct antifreeze membrane placement Suction adjustment Cooling-temperature selection Treatment-duration selection Body and submental protocols Client monitoring Post-treatment massage Aftercare guidance Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Antifreeze membranes, gels, applicator seals, hoses, filters, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, cold injury caused by incorrect membrane placement or operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation and health-history review must be completed before every treatment. Cryolipolysis should only be performed by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Cryoglobulinemia Cold agglutinin disease Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria Severe cold sensitivity or cold urticaria Raynaud’s disease or serious circulation disorders Active hernia within or near the treatment area Active infection or open wounds Severe skin conditions within the treatment area Reduced or impaired sensation Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Medical conditions requiring physician supervision The system is intended for suitable subcutaneous fat and should not be presented as a treatment for obesity or as a replacement for weight management. Cryolipolysis carries risks, including cold injury, prolonged numbness, contour irregularity, pain, and rare paradoxical adipose hyperplasia. Clients must receive appropriate risk information and provide informed consent. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, hoses, seals, and accessories before use. Confirm client suitability before every treatment. Select the correct applicator for the treatment area. Use a new, approved antifreeze membrane for every application. Ensure the membrane covers the complete cooling area. Begin with professionally selected cooling and suction settings. Monitor temperature, applicator contact, skin condition, and client comfort. Do not treat prohibited or unsuitable anatomical areas. Never reuse a single-use antifreeze membrane. Record applicator, temperature, suction, duration, and treatment area. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin changes occur. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Slimming clinics Body-contouring centers Medical spas Beauty salons Wellness centers Aesthetic clinics Professional spas Weight-management facilities Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing cryolipolysis treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine? Adjustable Controlled Cooling
The system provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C for professionally selected body-contouring protocols. Multiple Applicator Options
Different applicator sizes support customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and suitable submental areas. Intelligent Safety Controls
Real-time temperature monitoring, antifreeze membranes, pre-programmed protocols, and automatic shut-off support professional operation. Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can support customized body-contouring programs across several suitable anatomical areas. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine?
It is a professional controlled-cooling system developed for non-invasive fat-reduction and body-contouring treatments. How does cryolipolysis work?
Controlled cooling targets suitable subcutaneous fat tissue. The treated fat cells undergo a gradual biological response and are processed by the body over the following weeks. What cooling temperatures are available?
The machine provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back, buttock fold, and suitable double-chin areas. How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes per area, depending on the applicator and selected protocol. How many sessions are recommended?
One to three sessions per area, commonly spaced four to six weeks apart. The final plan should follow professional reassessment. When may clients notice changes?
Early changes may appear within two to four weeks, with progressive changes developing over approximately eight to sixteen weeks. Is the treatment painful?
Clients commonly experience strong cooling, suction, pulling, and temporary numbness. Some clients may experience discomfort during or after treatment. Is there downtime?
Many clients can resume normal activities following treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness, tingling, or numbness may occur. Are treated fat cells permanently removed?
Fat cells processed after treatment do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with weight gain, and individual contour changes are not guaranteed to be permanent. Is cryolipolysis a weight-loss treatment?
No. Cryolipolysis is intended for localized body contouring and is not a treatment for obesity or a replacement for balanced nutrition and exercise. What results are supplied for this machine?
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures are not guaranteed and vary by client and protocol. What is an antifreeze membrane?
It is a protective barrier applied between the skin and cooling applicator. Correct placement and full coverage are essential to reduce the risk of cold injury. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to tissue thickness, applicator fit, treatment settings, number of sessions, body composition, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator selection, membrane placement, cooling and suction settings, treatment protocols, aftercare, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine enables slimming clinics, medical spas, and body-contouring professionals to provide controlled fat-freezing treatments across multiple suitable body areas. Five key benefits: Adjustable controlled cooling from 5°C to −15°C Multiple applicators for different treatment areas Intelligent touchscreen with real-time temperature monitoring Antifreeze membrane protection and automatic shut-off CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
Controlled cryolipolysis
Non-invasive fat-freezing treatment
Cooling Range
5°C to −15°C
Adjustable treatment temperature
Applicators
Multiple sizes
Different body and submental areas
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes per area
Customized treatment planning
Treatment Course
Commonly one to three sessions per area
Progressive body-contouring program
Treatment Interval
Approximately four to six weeks
Allows professional reassessment
Temperature Monitoring
Real-time
Treatment safety and consistency
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Protocol and parameter management
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Applicator
Abdomen
Localized midsection contouring
Medium or large applicator
Waist and Flanks
Waistline and love-handle treatment
Suitable curved applicator
Upper Arms
Localized arm contouring
Small or medium applicator
Back and Bra Line
Targeted back-area treatment
Suitable medium applicator
Inner Thighs
Lower-body contouring
Small or medium applicator
Outer Thighs
Thigh-area body contouring
Suitable applicator
Buttock Fold
Localized contouring
Small or curved applicator
Double Chin
Submental-area treatment
Specialized small applicator
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine
Technology
Controlled cryolipolysis fat freezing
Cooling Range
5°C to −15°C adjustable
Treatment Applicators
Multiple sizes, package-dependent
Primary Function
Non-invasive fat reduction and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, flanks, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and double chin
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes per area
Recommended Course
Commonly one to three sessions per area
Treatment Interval
Approximately four to six weeks
Results Timeline
Progressive changes over approximately four to sixteen weeks
Display
Intelligent digital touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Pre-programmed and adjustable
Temperature Monitoring
Real-time
Safety Features
Antifreeze membranes and automatic shut-off
Power Supply
110V–240V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$1,699.00
Professional RF Microneedling Skin Rejuvenation System
Four Cartridge Options for Professional Facial and Body Treatments
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is a professional fractional radiofrequency system developed for aesthetic clinics, medical spas, dermatology practices and professional beauty centers.
The system combines controlled microneedling with radiofrequency energy to support skin tightening, collagen remodeling, wrinkle reduction, acne-scar improvement and body-contouring treatments.
Four cartridge options and an adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm allow trained practitioners to create customized protocols for different facial zones, body areas and skin concerns.
Four cartridge options | 0.2–7.0mm adjustable depth | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Cartridge Options on One Professional Platform 12-Pin Cartridge
The 12-pin cartridge is designed for precise treatments and smaller facial areas. Its concentrated treatment pattern makes it suitable for detailed skin-rejuvenation protocols and localized concerns. Common treatment applications include: Fine-line treatments Localized acne scars Under-eye areas Small facial zones Detailed texture-refinement protocols Precision collagen-remodeling treatments 24-Pin Cartridge
The 24-pin cartridge is a versatile option for general facial rejuvenation. It provides balanced treatment coverage for common facial skin concerns and medium-sized treatment areas. Common treatment applications include: Facial skin tightening Wrinkle treatments Uneven skin texture Enlarged-looking pores Mild facial laxity General collagen-remodeling protocols 40-Pin Cartridge
The 40-pin cartridge provides broader treatment coverage for larger facial and body areas. Its wider treatment pattern helps practitioners perform efficient treatments across areas requiring greater coverage. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Thighs Buttocks Upper arms Neck and décolletage Larger facial areas Nano Cartridge
The Nano cartridge is designed for superficial skin-rejuvenation and texture-refinement treatments. It supports surface-focused protocols without the deeper penetration provided by the pin cartridges. Common treatment applications include: Superficial skin refinement Uneven-looking texture Enlarged-looking pores Skin-tone improvement Maintenance-oriented treatments Overall skin-quality programs The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Cartridge for Each Treatment
The system supports four cartridge options. The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the size of the treatment area, required coverage and intended skin-rejuvenation protocol. Option 1: 12-Pin Cartridge
A precision-focused cartridge for smaller treatment areas and localized skin concerns. Recommended applications: Fine lines Localized acne scars Detailed facial treatments Small or delicate treatment zones Recommended for: Precision facial protocols Targeted scar treatments Localized collagen remodeling Clinics offering detailed facial services Option 2: 24-Pin Cartridge
A versatile cartridge for general facial rejuvenation and medium-sized areas. Recommended applications: Facial skin tightening Wrinkle treatments Uneven skin texture Enlarged-looking pores Recommended for: General facial rejuvenation Full-face treatment programs Skin-texture improvement Collagen-stimulation protocols Option 3: 40-Pin Cartridge
A broader-coverage cartridge for larger facial and body areas. Recommended applications: Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Buttock treatments Upper-arm treatments Recommended for: Body skin-firming programs Larger treatment areas Efficient body protocols Clinics expanding into face and body treatments Option 4: Nano Cartridge
A superficial cartridge for skin refinement and maintenance-oriented treatments. Recommended applications: Surface texture refinement Skin-tone improvement Enlarged-looking pores Superficial rejuvenation Recommended for: Gentle skin-quality treatments Maintenance protocols Surface-focused facial services Clients requiring superficial applications Precision Depth Control for Customized RF Microneedling
The system offers an adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. Each depth should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, cartridge type and professional protocol. The adjustable depth gives trained operators greater control over treatment placement and protocol customization. The correct depth must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area. Adjustable Treatment Depths
Different needle depths support different professional treatment requirements. Superficial Depths
0.2mm to 1.0mm Surface-focused skin-refinement protocols Fine-line appearance Delicate facial zones Maintenance-oriented treatments Mid-Depth Treatments
1.0mm to 3.0mm General facial rejuvenation Skin-tightening protocols Uneven texture Acne-scar appearance Collagen-remodeling treatments Deeper Treatments
3.0mm to 7.0mm Appropriately selected body areas Abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms Body skin-firming protocols Deeper professional treatment programs Professional Face and Body Applications
The available treatments depend on the cartridge, needle depth and professional protocol selected. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, treatment goals and suitability. The appropriate cartridge, needle depth and RF parameters are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The selected cartridge is installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the handpiece and cartridge are correctly connected before beginning treatment. 3. Parameter Selection
Needle depth, RF energy, frequency and other available settings are selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the treatment handpiece to the selected area using the appropriate technique. Session duration varies according to the cartridge, treatment depth, area size and protocol. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, dryness, pinpoint marks or other expected skin responses may occur following RF microneedling treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines a 10.4-inch control screen with adjustable RF microneedling technology for streamlined use in professional settings. Key operating advantages include: 10.4-inch control screen Four interchangeable cartridge options Adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm Face and body treatment capability Adjustable 1–15MHz RF frequency Specialized 6MHz thermal RF mode Maximum 500W output power Compact vertical professional design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
Package contents include the main equipment, treatment handpiece, cartridge options and professional operating guidance. Standard Equipment
One RF microneedling main unit One professional treatment handpiece 12-pin cartridge 24-pin cartridge 40-pin cartridge Nano cartridge Treatment-handle connection components Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Cartridge installation guidance Needle-depth selection training RF-parameter guidance Facial and body treatment guidance Safety and operating instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Treatment-handpiece operation Cartridge installation Cartridge selection Needle-depth adjustment Control-interface operation RF-parameter selection Facial and body treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Control screen and operating system Original treatment handpiece Handpiece-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handpiece operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cartridges and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional RF microneedling equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Recent isotretinoin use Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Conditions affecting normal healing A history of abnormal or keloid scarring Other contraindications listed in the operating manual RF microneedling cartridges must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Dermatology practices Professional beauty centers Skin-rejuvenation professionals Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their facial and body treatment services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose This RF Microneedling System? Select the Appropriate Cartridge
Four cartridge options allow practitioners to select the appropriate coverage pattern for different facial zones, body areas and skin concerns. Treat the Face and Body
The system supports professional protocols for the face, jawline, neck, décolletage, abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms. Work at Adjustable Treatment Depths
The adjustable 0.2–7.0mm depth range supports superficial, mid-depth and deeper professional applications. Expand Your Service Menu
One professional platform can support facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, wrinkle treatments, acne-scar protocols, texture refinement and body skin-firming services. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the four cartridges?
The 12-pin cartridge supports precise and localized treatments. The 24-pin cartridge is suitable for general facial rejuvenation. The 40-pin cartridge provides broader coverage for larger face and body areas. The Nano cartridge supports superficial skin-refinement protocols. How is RF microneedling different from traditional microneedling?
Traditional microneedling creates controlled microchannels without delivering radiofrequency energy. This system combines microneedling with RF energy to support thermal collagen remodeling, skin tightening and texture improvement. What is the adjustable needle-depth range?
The needle depth can be adjusted from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. The appropriate depth should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, cartridge and professional protocol. Which cartridge is best for facial treatments?
The 12-pin and 24-pin cartridges are suitable for many professional facial protocols. The final selection depends on the treatment area, skin condition and required coverage. Which cartridge is best for body treatments?
The 40-pin cartridge provides broader coverage for larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, buttocks and upper arms. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session takes approximately 30–60 minutes. Treatment time varies according to the selected area, cartridge, depth and professional protocol. How quickly will clients see results?
Results vary according to the treatment area, skin condition, treatment parameters and individual biological response. Progressive improvement may develop as the skin-remodeling process continues. Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, dryness or pinpoint marks may occur after treatment. The duration varies according to treatment depth, RF settings and individual response. Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine combines: Four professional cartridge options Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth A 10.4-inch control screen Professional face and body applications Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its cartridges, treatment applications and professional training. Order Your RF Microneedling Machine and Request a Quote
Depth Range
Recommended Application
0.2–1.0mm
Superficial skin-refinement and delicate-area protocols
1.0–2.0mm
General facial rejuvenation and fine-line treatments
2.0–4.0mm
Deeper facial skin tightening and scar-remodeling protocols
4.0–7.0mm
Appropriately selected body areas and deeper professional applications
Treatment Area
Applicable Cartridge
Intended Aesthetic Application
Under-eye area
12-pin
Delicate skin-firming and fine-line protocols
Face and cheeks
12-pin or 24-pin
Facial rejuvenation and texture improvement
Jawline and lower face
24-pin
Skin tightening and contour refinement
Neck and décolletage
24-pin or 40-pin
Firming and texture-improvement protocols
Acne scars
12-pin or 24-pin
Targeted collagen-remodeling treatments
Abdomen
40-pin
Body skin firming and texture improvement
Thighs and buttocks
40-pin
Body rejuvenation and firming protocols
Superficial facial areas
Nano
Texture, tone and skin-quality improvement
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine
Product Type
Professional fractional RF microneedling system
Technology
Fractional radiofrequency microneedling
Maximum Output Power
500W
Input Voltage
100V / 110V / 220V
Control Interface
10.4-inch control screen
RF Frequency
1–15MHz adjustable
Thermal RF Mode
6MHz
Cartridge Options
12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin and Nano
Adjustable Needle Depth
0.2–7.0mm
Treatment-Area Sizes
1.1 × 1.1cm, 1.6 × 1.6cm, 1.6 × 1.5cm and 2 × 2cm
Machine Dimensions
40 × 36 × 81cm
Machine Weight
13.3kg
Package Dimensions
49 × 46 × 102cm
Package Weight
28.4kg
Intended Applications
Skin tightening, wrinkle reduction, acne-scar improvement, texture refinement and body treatments
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
From $2,399.00
Professional Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine
Dual-Technology Muscle Building, Fat Reduction, and Skin-Firming System
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system that combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy.
HI-EMT energy stimulates powerful supramaximal muscle contractions, while controlled RF heating supports fat metabolism, collagen production, and firmer-looking skin. This combination enables professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality within one treatment program.
The system includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy levels, and air-and-water circulation cooling. It is designed for slimming clinics, aesthetic centers, gyms, wellness facilities, physiotherapy centers where locally permitted, and professional body-contouring businesses.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Ergonomic Applicators | Dual-Client Capability | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform HI-EMT Muscle Stimulation
High-intensity focused electromagnetic energy stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone. The supplied product specification states that one 30-minute session can generate approximately 20,000–30,000 muscle contractions. These contractions support muscle activation, conditioning, firmness, and improved definition. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle toning Gluteal muscle stimulation Thigh conditioning Upper-arm definition Core-strengthening support Improved muscle firmness Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue while the electromagnetic function activates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat metabolism, collagen stimulation, and improved skin firmness. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction support Waistline contouring Abdominal shaping Thigh and arm treatments Skin-firming programs Smoother-looking body contours Four-Applicator Multi-Area Treatment
The system includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options. The different handle shapes help professionals position applicators securely over a variety of body contours and muscle groups. Depending on the machine configuration and treatment protocol, the applicators can support multi-area treatments or sessions for two suitable clients simultaneously. Common applications include: Simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas Abdomen and waistline programs Buttock and thigh treatments Arm and abdominal combinations Two-client treatment workflows High-volume professional scheduling Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Building and Toning Program
A focused HI-EMT program designed to stimulate powerful muscle contractions and improve the appearance of tone, strength, and definition. Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients seeking stronger-looking muscles, improved definition, and enhanced body tone. Fat-Reduction and Skin-Firming Program
A combined HI-EMT and RF protocol designed to support localized fat reduction while improving the appearance of skin firmness. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, thighs, buttocks, and arms. Recommended for: Clients with localized fat deposits and reduced skin firmness in compatible treatment areas. Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A dual-technology program that addresses muscle tone, localized fat, skin quality, and body shape within one structured treatment course. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible treatment combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits instead of a single-function treatment. Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone, definition, and body-contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated muscle groups and body areas. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want periodic maintenance treatments. Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings HI-EMT and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s physical condition, treatment area, muscle response, skin sensation, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdominal and waist areas are suitable for combined muscle-stimulation, fat-reduction, and skin-firming programs. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Improved abdominal definition Core-conditioning support Waistline contouring Localized fat-reduction support Firmer-looking abdominal skin Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Straight or curved applicators can be positioned over compatible upper-body muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy. Treatment objectives include: Biceps and triceps stimulation Upper-arm toning Improved muscle definition Localized contouring Firmer-looking skin Better upper-body proportions Buttocks and Thigh Areas
Curved applicators can follow compatible lower-body contours to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles. Treatment objectives include: Buttock lifting and toning Gluteal muscle stimulation Thigh conditioning Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Localized fat-reduction support Improved lower-body definition Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s body-contouring goals, medical history, physical condition, previous procedures, implanted devices, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Assess the selected treatment area, identify the target muscle groups, and determine the most appropriate applicator shape and placement. Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position the straight or curved applicators securely over the selected muscle groups. Confirm that all straps and connections are correctly fitted before starting treatment. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, HI-EMT intensity, and RF level through the 12-inch touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the energy gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated areas, and provide hydration, stretching, physical activity, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations. Mild temporary muscle soreness may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine combines dual-technology performance, flexible applicator positioning, and intelligent controls for professional body-contouring environments. Key advantages include: Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology Four ergonomic treatment applicators Straight and curved handle options Multi-area treatment capability Dual-client workflow capability Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Structured 4–6-session treatment courses 12-inch intelligent touchscreen Adjustable treatment intensity Air-and-water circulation cooling 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications The stated contraction count, result timeline, and result duration are supplied product-performance estimates. Individual experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, physical condition, diet, activity level, treatment settings, treatment frequency, and maintenance. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine 4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators Straight and curved applicator options Compatible applicator straps Standard handle connections 1 × Compatible power cable Standard operating accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Touchscreen operating instructions Applicator-placement guidance HI-EMT and RF treatment protocols Contraindication and safety guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional operator training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers use the EMSlim RF system correctly and confidently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Touchscreen operation Straight and curved applicator selection Correct applicator positioning HI-EMT energy adjustment RF intensity adjustment Multi-area treatment planning Dual-client workflow guidance Client consultation and contraindication screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Treatment-course planning Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults occurring under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are supplied. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed description of the technical issue. Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem. Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect machine operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Operation without the required cooling conditions Water damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every initial treatment. The machine should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or plans to become pregnant Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Active muscle injury or severe inflammation Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled diabetes Open wounds or damaged skin Recent surgery in the intended treatment area Abdominal or inguinal hernia Reduced sensation in the treatment area Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with implanted devices, metal implants, serious medical conditions, or recent surgery should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a detailed health screening before treatment. Assess the client’s physical condition and body-contouring goals. Ensure the client is adequately hydrated. Advise clients to avoid heavy meals shortly before treatment. Remove metal jewelry and accessories from the treatment area. Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and cooling system. Position applicators only over suitable muscle groups. Secure all applicators before activating the system. Begin with a low HI-EMT and RF intensity. Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance. Monitor muscle response, skin warmth, and client comfort continuously. Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, or abnormal discomfort. Do not place applicators over the head, heart, chest, or injured tissue. Do not exceed the recommended treatment time. Allow appropriate recovery time between sessions. Clean and disinfect applicators after every client. Follow all cooling-system and maintenance requirements. Keep accurate client and treatment records when required. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Body-contouring centers Beauty salons Slimming clinics Medical spas where locally permitted Wellness centers Gyms and fitness studios Physiotherapy centers where locally permitted Professional muscle-conditioning providers Operators should complete appropriate training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments. Why Choose the Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine? 1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The system combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF tissue heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness in one treatment program. 2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four straight and curved applicators support customized positioning across the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline. 3. Multi-Area and Dual-Client Capability
The four-handle configuration supports efficient multi-area treatments and can accommodate dual-client workflows when permitted by the machine configuration and treatment protocol. 4. Intelligent Professional Operation
A 12-inch touchscreen, adjustable energy settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient operation in high-demand professional environments. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, after-sales technical support, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines HI-EMT muscle stimulation with radiofrequency heating. HI-EMT generates powerful muscle contractions, while RF energy heats the underlying tissue to support fat metabolism and skin firmness. Q: What is the difference between EMSlim RF and a standard electromagnetic machine?
A standard electromagnetic system primarily focuses on muscle stimulation. This system adds RF heating to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments alongside muscle conditioning. Q: How many applicators are included?
The machine includes four ergonomic applicators with straight and curved options. Q: Why are straight and curved applicators provided?
Different applicator shapes help professionals position the handles over various muscle groups and natural body contours. Q: Can the machine treat two clients simultaneously?
The four-handle configuration can support two-client treatment workflows when permitted by the control configuration, professional protocol, and local operating requirements. Q: Can multiple body areas be treated during one appointment?
Yes. Compatible body areas may be treated simultaneously when supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, buttocks, thighs, and upper arms. Q: How long does one session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A standard starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions. Q: How frequently should sessions be scheduled?
Treatments are commonly scheduled approximately twice per week with suitable recovery time between sessions. Q: How many muscle contractions occur during a session?
The supplied product specification states that a 30-minute session can generate approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions. Q: Is the contraction count equal to completing 20,000–30,000 exercises?
The number is a product-performance comparison describing repeated muscle stimulation. It should not be interpreted as an exact replacement for conventional exercise. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally experience strong muscle contractions and warmth from the RF energy. Intensity should be increased gradually and adjusted according to individual comfort. Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to normal activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to the feeling after exercise may occur. Q: When can clients expect results?
Some clients may notice early changes after several sessions. Muscle definition, body contour, and skin firmness may continue developing during the weeks following a completed treatment course. Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 6–12 months with an appropriate lifestyle and maintenance plan. Individual result duration varies. Q: Are maintenance treatments recommended?
Periodic maintenance sessions may help support muscle tone and body-contouring results. Frequency should be determined according to the client’s response and goals. Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim RF treatments should complement regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, hydration, and a healthy lifestyle. Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional. Q: What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses air-and-water circulation cooling to support temperature management during professional operation. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, touchscreen operation, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add EMSlim RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine gives clinics, salons, gyms, wellness centers, and body-contouring professionals a versatile solution for muscle building, fat-reduction support, skin firming, and multi-area body sculpting. Five key benefits: Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology Four ergonomic straight and curved applicators Multi-area and dual-client treatment capability Intelligent 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
HI-EMT Intensity
Adjustable electromagnetic energy
Adapts muscle stimulation to the treatment area and client tolerance
RF Energy
Adjustable controlled heating
Supports fat metabolism and skin-firming treatments
Applicator Configuration
Four ergonomic handles
Enables flexible single-area, multi-area, or dual-client treatment
Applicator Shape
Straight and curved options
Supports secure positioning across different body contours
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Allows efficient professional treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Provides a structured program for progressive body-contouring results
Treatment Frequency
Approximately twice per week
Allows recovery time between muscle-stimulation sessions
Control Interface
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient program selection and energy adjustment
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports temperature control during continuous professional operation
Power Supply
110V/220V compatibility
Supports operation in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Muscle Toning
Abdomen
Stimulate the abdominal muscles and improve definition
Core Conditioning
Abdomen and core
Support muscle activation and core firmness
Waistline Contouring
Waist and sides
Improve the appearance of waistline shape
Buttock Toning
Buttocks
Stimulate gluteal muscles and support a firmer appearance
Thigh Sculpting
Inner and outer thighs
Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours
Arm Definition
Biceps and triceps
Support upper-arm conditioning and definition
Localized Fat Reduction
Compatible body areas
Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits
Skin-Firming Treatment
Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of skin firmness and texture
Multi-Area Sculpting
Compatible area combinations
Address more than one body zone within a treatment plan
Maintenance Treatment
Previously treated areas
Help maintain muscle tone and body-contouring results
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Four-Handle EMSlim RF Sculpting Machine
Technology
HI-EMT and radiofrequency heating
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Applicator Options
Straight and curved handles
Primary Functions
Muscle building, muscle toning, fat-reduction support, skin firming, and body contouring
Muscle Contractions
Approximately 20,000–30,000 supramaximal contractions per 30-minute session
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waistline, thighs, buttocks, and arms
Multi-Area Capability
Compatible body areas may be treated simultaneously
Dual-Client Capability
Supports two-client treatment workflows when permitted by the machine configuration and protocol
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Recommended Frequency
Approximately twice per week with suitable recovery intervals
Results Duration
Supplied estimate of 6–12 months with an appropriate lifestyle and maintenance
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display and Controls
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Energy Intensity
Adjustable according to the body area and client tolerance
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$3,999.00
Professional Four-Handle NEO EMShape Body-Sculpting System Straight and Curved Electromagnetic Applicators for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple body areas. The machine combines advanced EMShape technology with four ergonomic applicators: two straight handles for conventional placement and two curved handles designed for improved contact across contoured body areas. With approximately 20,000 muscle contractions per session, adjustable treatment settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, air-and-water cooling, and a professional vertical design, the system is suitable for body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, fitness facilities, and wellness studios. EMShape technology | Two straight and two curved handles | Vertical tower design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform EMShape Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
EMShape technology delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Waistline definition Calf muscle stimulation Straight and Curved Applicator Treatment
The system includes two straight and two curved applicators for different body shapes and placement requirements. Common benefits include: Conventional straight-handle placement Improved contact on contoured body areas Focused muscle stimulation Bilateral treatment capability Multi-area treatment flexibility Customized applicator positioning Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Abdomen and thigh treatments Arms and abdomen Buttocks and thighs Waistline and love-handle areas Bilateral calf treatments Customized multi-area programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal and Waistline Program
Uses suitable straight or curved applicators to stimulate abdominal muscles and support midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Waistline sculpting Love-handle-area programs General midsection definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for lower-body treatment. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs Arm and Calf Program
Uses suitable applicators for upper-arm and calf muscle-conditioning treatments. Recommended applications: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Biceps and triceps conditioning Calf muscle stimulation Bilateral limb treatments Improved-looking muscle definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm or calf tone Fitness and body-contouring clients Clients requiring smaller-area applicator placement Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial NEO EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Multi-area conditioning Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning NEO EMSlim clients Clients completing six to eight initial sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to applicator type, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waistline
Straight or curved handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Love-handle-area treatment Multi-zone midsection sculpting Buttocks and Thighs
Curved and straight applicators support customized placement across suitable lower-body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatment Improved-looking definition Lower-body sculpting Arms and Calves
The applicator selection supports suitable upper-arm and lower-leg treatment programs. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Arm definition Calf muscle conditioning Bilateral limb treatment Customized smaller-area programs Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Selection and Placement
Select straight or curved handles according to the treatment area and client anatomy. Position and secure the applicators over suitable muscle groups. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response. Step 4: EMShape Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine combines EMShape technology with straight and curved applicator options. Key advantages include: Professional EMShape technology Four ergonomic treatment handles Two straight applicators Two curved applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations Treatments for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, and calves Vertical professional design Adjustable energy intensity 12-inch intelligent touchscreen Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Six- to eight-session treatment programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim main unit 2 × Straight EMShape treatment applicators 2 × Curved EMShape treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories 12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls Air-and-water circulation cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Straight-handle placement guidance Curved-handle placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Straight-handle placement Curved-handle placement Applicator selection by body area Energy-level adjustment Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment planning Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Remove metal objects from each treatment area. Select the correct straight or curved applicator. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with conservative energy levels. Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort. Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record applicator type, treatment area, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Premium body-sculpting clinics Medical spas Slimming centers Aesthetic salons Fitness facilities Gyms Wellness centers Professional body-contouring studios Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMShape or HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine? Straight and Curved Applicators
Two straight and two curved handles support customized placement across different body shapes and treatment areas. Professional EMShape Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session. Multiple Treatment Areas
One machine supports customized programs for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, straight- and curved-handle guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional electromagnetic body-sculpting system with two straight and two curved applicators. What is EMShape technology?
EMShape is the supplied electromagnetic muscle-stimulation technology used by this system to produce repeated involuntary muscle contractions. What is different about the curved handles?
The curved applicators are designed to improve placement and contact across suitable contoured body areas. Correct selection depends on the client’s anatomy and treatment area. Do curved handles guarantee deeper muscle engagement?
No. Treatment depth and response depend on electromagnetic output, applicator position, client anatomy, settings, and individual response. How many applicators are included?
The package includes four handles: two straight applicators and two curved applicators. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
The four-handle system supports suitable multi-area operation according to the selected protocol and machine configuration. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur. Can EMShape replace regular exercise?
EMShape treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course. What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-definition improvement of up to 30% and fat reduction of up to 20%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes. How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, applicator selection, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, straight- and curved-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Curved-Handle EMShape Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, and wellness professionals to provide customized electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments using straight and curved applicators. Five key benefits: Professional EMShape electromagnetic technology Two straight and two curved ergonomic applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
EMShape electromagnetic stimulation
Muscle-conditioning treatments
Treatment Handles
Four
Multi-area treatment capability
Straight Handles
Two
Conventional and precise placement
Curved Handles
Two
Contoured and ergonomic placement
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Six to eight sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive muscle conditioning
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized client comfort
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Applicator Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Straight or curved handles
Waistline
Contouring and core-area stimulation
Curved-handle placement
Love Handles
Side-body conditioning
Curved-handle placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Bilateral curved or straight handles
Inner and Outer Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Suitable bilateral placement
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Straight handles
Calves
Lower-leg muscle conditioning
Suitable straight or curved handles
Multiple Areas
Comprehensive body-sculpting program
Up to four handles
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine
Technology
HI-EMT with EMShape technology
Design
Vertical tower
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Straight Handles
Two
Curved Handles
Two
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Primary Functions
Muscle conditioning and body contouring
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 30% increased muscle definition and 20% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves
Treatment Configuration
Focused, bilateral, or multi-area
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
From $600.00
Professional HIEMT and Radiofrequency Body Sculpting System
Four Treatment Handles for Muscle Stimulation and Body-Contouring Programs
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is a professional dual-technology platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system combines High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscle groups, while RF provides controlled thermal energy for suitable body-care and skin-firming protocols.
Four treatment handles support individual or simultaneous multi-area programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms, calves and obliques. The system can be upgraded to six or eight handles.
HIEMT and RF technology | Four treatment handles | 16-Tesla magnetic field | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform HIEMT Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic technology delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses to selected muscle groups. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Gluteal muscle programs Thigh conditioning Upper-arm stimulation Calf-muscle programs General body conditioning Radiofrequency Energy
The RF function provides controlled heating across suitable treatment areas. Common applications include: Skin-firming support Body-contour refinement Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs General body-care services Repeated Muscle Contractions
The system produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session. Common applications include: Core-conditioning support Muscle-activation programs Muscle-toning services Fitness-oriented treatments Body-sculpting programs Maintenance sessions Four-Handle Multi-Area Treatment
Four handles allow practitioners to create individual or simultaneous treatment protocols. Common applications include: Abdomen and obliques Left and right thighs Buttocks and thighs Upper arms Calves Customized multi-area programs The appropriate handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF temperature and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customized HIEMT and RF programs for different body areas. Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and deep-core muscle areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-conditioning support Abdomen contour programs Oblique muscle stimulation Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Body-sculpting clients Busy professionals Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups. Recommended applications: Gluteal muscle stimulation Buttock-conditioning programs Muscle-tone support Lower-body contour care Recommended for: Fitness clients Body-contouring studios Wellness-center members Clients seeking lower-body conditioning Program 3: Thighs and Calves
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups. Recommended applications: Quadriceps stimulation Hamstring programs Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Calf-muscle activation Recommended for: Athletes Fitness enthusiasts Lower-body conditioning programs Professional wellness services Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps, triceps and forearm areas. Recommended applications: Biceps stimulation Triceps stimulation Forearm conditioning Upper-arm contour support Recommended for: Fitness-center clients Upper-body programs Body-sculpting services Customized muscle-conditioning plans Adjustable Energy for Customized Treatments The EMSlim HIEMT Machine provides adjustable HIEMT intensity and radiofrequency settings for different body areas and client tolerance levels. The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity, RF energy and client comfort. New clients should begin with conservative HIEMT and RF settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Four treatment handles support professional programs across multiple body areas. Core and Upper-Body Treatments Abdomen Core muscles Obliques Biceps Triceps Forearms Lower-Body Treatments
Buttocks Quadriceps Hamstrings Inner thighs Outer thighs Calves Combined Body Programs
Abdomen and obliques Abdomen and thighs Buttocks and thighs Left and right upper arms Customized multi-area courses Maintenance-oriented programs Professional Muscle and Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on handle placement, HIEMT intensity, RF settings, session duration and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment objectives, previous procedures and contraindications. 2. Handle Placement
The selected treatment areas are prepared. Conductive gel is applied where required, and the treatment handles are positioned and secured according to the operating protocol. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the HIEMT intensity, RF settings, treatment program and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance. 4. HIEMT and RF Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses and controlled RF energy through the selected handles. A typical treatment lasts approximately 30 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the handles are removed and the treatment areas are cleaned. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance. Temporary warmth, muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur after treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines HIEMT and RF technologies with four treatment handles and professional cooling for continuous operation. Key operating advantages include: HIEMT electromagnetic stimulation Controlled radiofrequency energy 16-Tesla magnetic field Four treatment handles Upgradeable six- or eight-handle configurations Pre-programmed treatment protocols Water-cooling system 110V–240V power compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment handles and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One EMSlim HIEMT main unit Four HIEMT and RF treatment handles Handle-positioning straps Handle-connection components One starter bottle of conductive gel Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Treatment table when included with the selected order Documentation and Training
English operating manual Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup Handle-placement guidance HIEMT-intensity adjustment RF-setting guidance Pre-programmed treatment protocols Client-positioning guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Setup assistance Certificate of Authenticity Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Treatment-handle installation Handle placement by muscle group HIEMT-intensity adjustment RF parameter selection Abdomen and core programs Gluteal muscle programs Thigh and leg programs Upper-arm programs Multi-handle operation Client-comfort monitoring Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Three-Year Warranty
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine is supported by a three-year comprehensive warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system HIEMT energy components Radiofrequency components Water-cooling system Original treatment handles Handle cables and connectors Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect handle placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of straps, cables and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic and radiofrequency equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe neurological conditions Active or suspected blood clots Hernia in the treatment area Recent surgery Open wounds or severe skin conditions Acute inflammation Severe muscle injury Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be assessed before treatment. RF temperature and HIEMT intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Fitness centers Medical spas Wellness clinics Body-sculpting studios Beauty salons Sports and recovery centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their body-conditioning services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine? Combine HIEMT and RF
The system combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with controlled radiofrequency energy in one professional platform. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Four handles support professional programs for the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves. Customize Every Session
Adjustable HIEMT intensity, RF settings and pre-programmed protocols allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups and client tolerance. Expand the System
The standard four-handle configuration can be upgraded to six or eight handles for greater treatment capacity. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year comprehensive warranty, professional training, setup assistance and ongoing customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does the EMSlim HIEMT Machine work?
The machine combines HIEMT electromagnetic pulses with controlled radiofrequency energy. HIEMT produces repeated contractions in selected muscles, while RF provides controlled heating for suitable body-care protocols. What is the 16-Tesla electromagnetic field?
The supplied specification describes a 16-Tesla magnetic-field output used to deliver high-intensity electromagnetic stimulation through the treatment handles. What does the four-handle design provide?
Four handles allow practitioners to treat individual or multiple suitable body areas during one session. The system can also be upgraded to six or eight handles. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps, forearms and calves. How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional course may include approximately 4–6 sessions, commonly scheduled one or two times per week. The final protocol depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions and warmth from RF. The intensity and RF settings should remain within the client’s tolerance. Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue, soreness, warmth or redness may occur. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The comprehensive warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add HIEMT and RF Body Sculpting to Your Business
The EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine combines: High-intensity focused electromagnetic stimulation Controlled radiofrequency energy Four treatment handles with upgrade options Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs Three-year comprehensive warranty and ongoing support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its handle configurations, treatment protocols and professional training. Order Your EMSlim HIEMT Machine and Request Pricing
Treatment Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Intensity
First-time clients and initial muscle activation
Moderate Intensity
General professional muscle-conditioning programs
Higher Intensity
Appropriately selected experienced clients
Customized HIEMT and RF
Muscle-specific protocols based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Fitness or Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
HIEMT and RF
Core stimulation and contour support
Obliques
HIEMT and RF
Side-body muscle conditioning
Buttocks
HIEMT
Gluteal muscle stimulation
Thighs
HIEMT and RF
Lower-body conditioning
Upper arms
HIEMT and RF
Biceps and triceps stimulation
Calves
HIEMT
Calf-muscle activation
Multiple areas
Four-handle operation
Simultaneous professional treatment
Maintenance
Customized program
Ongoing muscle and body-care support
Specification
Details
Product Name
EMSlim HIEMT Body Sculpting Machine
Product Type
Professional HIEMT and RF body-sculpting system
Technology
High-intensity electromagnetic technology stimulation and radiofrequency
Electromagnetic Field
16 Tesla
Treatment Handles
Four, upgradeable to six or eight
Programmed Contractions
More than 20,000 to 30000 per session
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Suggested Protocol
Approximately 4–6 sessions, one or two times per week
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, obliques, buttocks, thighs, arms and calves
Control Interface
Touchscreen with pre-programmed protocols
Cooling System
Water-cooled for continuous professional operation
Power Supply
110V–240V
Warranty
Three-year comprehensive warranty
Support
Customer support by email, telephone and WhatsApp
Receives in 7 days.
$2,500.00
Professional 360° Cryolipolysis Fat-Freezing System Surround Cooling Technology for Dual-Area Fat Reduction and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for controlled fat-freezing treatments across multiple body areas. Its 360° applicators distribute cooling around the treatment chamber rather than limiting cooling to two contact surfaces. This design supports consistent temperature distribution across suitable tissue held inside the applicator. With adjustable temperatures from 5°C to −15°C, dual-handle operation, multiple applicator sizes, real-time temperature monitoring, and a 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen, the system is suitable for slimming clinics, beauty salons, medical spas, and wellness centers. 360° surround cooling | Dual-handle operation | 5°C to −15°C range | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform 360° Surround Cooling
The applicator delivers controlled cooling around suitable subcutaneous tissue held within the treatment chamber. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Waist and flank contouring Upper-arm programs Inner- and outer-thigh treatments Back and bra-line treatments Suitable submental-area treatments Dual-Handle Cryolipolysis
Two handles can operate during the same appointment, supporting simultaneous treatment of two suitable areas. Common benefits include: Two-area treatment capability Bilateral body treatments Customized applicator combinations Improved clinic scheduling Flexible body-contouring programs Efficient professional operation Intelligent Temperature and Safety Control
The system combines adjustable cooling with real-time monitoring and skin-protection measures. Common features include: Adjustable cooling temperature Real-time temperature monitoring Intelligent treatment protocols Antifreeze membrane protection Automatic safety controls Touchscreen parameter management Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdomen and Waist Program
Uses appropriately sized applicators for suitable abdominal, waist, or flank tissue. Recommended applications: Upper-abdomen treatments Lower-abdomen treatments Waistline contouring Flank and love-handle areas General midsection programs Recommended for: Clients with suitable pinchable subcutaneous fat Clients seeking non-invasive midsection contouring Clients with stable and realistic treatment goals Arms and Back Program
Uses suitable small or medium applicators for upper-arm, underarm, back, or bra-line areas. Recommended applications: Upper-arm contouring Underarm-area treatments Upper-back programs Lower-back contouring Bra-line treatments Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized upper-body areas Clients suitable for controlled cooling Clients seeking targeted body contouring Thigh and Buttock Program
Uses suitable applicators for professionally assessed inner-thigh, outer-thigh, or lower-buttock areas. Recommended applications: Inner-thigh contouring Outer-thigh treatments Upper-leg body contouring Lower-buttock fold treatments Bilateral lower-body programs Recommended for: Clients with suitable thigh-area tissue Clients seeking lower-body contouring Clients receiving bilateral treatment plans Submental and Follow-Up Program
Uses a suitable small applicator for professionally assessed submental areas or provides additional treatment after reassessment. Recommended applications: Double-chin-area contouring Small localized areas Follow-up treatments Multi-area treatment planning Long-term body-contouring support Recommended for: Clients with suitable submental tissue Clients completing an initial treatment Clients requiring professionally assessed follow-up care Adjustable Cooling and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the applicator, body area, tissue condition, and client tolerance. Temperature, suction, and treatment duration should be selected according to the applicator, tissue thickness, skin condition, client response, and supplied protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen, Waist, and Flanks
Different applicator sizes support controlled cooling across suitable midsection areas. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-abdomen contouring Lower-abdomen contouring Waistline definition Love-handle treatments General midsection shaping Arms, Back, and Buttocks
Suitable applicators can be selected for localized upper-body and posterior body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Bra-line treatments Upper- and lower-back areas Lower-buttock fold treatments Localized body shaping Thighs and Double Chin
Small, medium, or specialized applicators support professionally assessed lower-body and submental treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Inner-thigh contouring Outer-thigh treatments Upper-leg shaping Double-chin-area contouring Bilateral body treatments Professional Treatment Applications Applicator availability and final configuration depend on the selected machine package. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, body-contouring objectives, target areas, previous procedures, skin condition, and possible contraindications. Confirm that the selected areas contain suitable tissue for cryolipolysis. Step 2: Area and Applicator Selection
Mark one or two treatment areas and select applicators that match the tissue size, shape, and anatomical location. Step 3: Skin Protection and Placement
Apply a new approved antifreeze membrane correctly over each complete treatment area. Position the applicators and adjust suction according to the supplied protocol. Step 4: Controlled Cooling Treatment
Begin the selected cooling program for approximately 30–60 minutes. Monitor temperature, applicator seals, skin condition, and client comfort throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the applicators and protective membranes, inspect the skin, and perform the recommended post-treatment massage when appropriate. Document the settings and provide aftercare guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine combines surround cooling, dual-handle operation, and intelligent safety controls. Key advantages include: Professional 360° cryolipolysis technology Surround cooling within the applicator chamber Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C Dual-handle operation Simultaneous two-area treatment Multiple applicator sizes Treatments for several body areas 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen Real-time temperature monitoring Antifreeze membrane protection Approximately 30–60-minute sessions 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes because individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis main unit Multiple 360° cooling applicators according to the selected package Dual-handle connection system Applicator connection hoses Applicator-positioning accessories 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen Real-time temperature-monitoring system Antifreeze membranes and gel starter supply 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card The exact number, size, and shape of included applicators should follow the selected machine configuration. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions 360° applicator-selection guidance Dual-handle operation guidance Cooling-temperature guidance Suction-adjustment guidance Body-area treatment protocols Submental-treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Aftercare instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Tissue and treatment-area assessment Applicator selection Dual-handle treatment planning Correct antifreeze membrane placement Suction adjustment Cooling-temperature selection Treatment-duration selection Body and submental protocols Client monitoring Post-treatment massage Aftercare guidance Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Antifreeze membranes, gels, applicator seals, hoses, filters, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, cold injury caused by incorrect membrane placement or operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation and health-history review must be completed before every treatment. Cryolipolysis should only be performed by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Cryoglobulinemia Cold agglutinin disease Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria Severe cold sensitivity or cold urticaria Raynaud’s disease or serious circulation disorders Active hernia within or near the treatment area Active infection or open wounds Severe skin conditions within the treatment area Reduced or impaired sensation Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Medical conditions requiring physician supervision The system is intended for suitable subcutaneous fat and should not be presented as a treatment for obesity or as a replacement for weight management. Cryolipolysis carries risks, including cold injury, prolonged numbness, bruising, contour irregularity, pain, and rare paradoxical adipose hyperplasia. Clients must receive appropriate risk information and provide informed consent. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, hoses, seals, and accessories before use. Confirm client suitability before every treatment. Select the correct applicator for each treatment area. Use a new approved antifreeze membrane for every applicator. Ensure each membrane covers the complete cooling area. Begin with professionally selected cooling and suction settings. Monitor temperature, applicator contact, skin condition, and client comfort. Continuously monitor both areas during dual-handle operation. Do not treat prohibited or unsuitable anatomical areas. Never reuse a single-use antifreeze membrane. Record applicators, temperatures, suction, duration, and treatment areas. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin changes occur. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Slimming clinics Body-contouring centers Medical spas Beauty salons Wellness centers Aesthetic clinics Professional spas Physiotherapy and recovery centers Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing cryolipolysis treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine? 360° Surround Cooling
The applicator distributes controlled cooling around suitable tissue held within the treatment chamber. Dual-Handle Operation
Two applicators can support simultaneous treatment of two suitable areas during one professionally monitored appointment. Multiple Applicator Options
Different applicator sizes support customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and suitable submental areas. Intelligent Safety Controls
Real-time temperature monitoring, antifreeze membranes, touchscreen settings, and intelligent protection features support professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator guidance, dual-handle protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine?
It is a professional controlled-cooling system with 360° applicators, dual-handle operation, and multiple applicator sizes for non-invasive body-contouring treatments. How does 360° cryolipolysis differ from two-sided cooling?
A 360° applicator distributes cooling around the tissue held inside its treatment chamber, while a traditional applicator may cool primarily from limited contact surfaces. Does 360° cooling guarantee better results?
No. Treatment outcomes depend on applicator fit, tissue suitability, temperature, duration, membrane placement, number of sessions, and individual response. Can two areas be treated simultaneously?
Yes. The dual-handle system supports treatment of two suitable areas during the same appointment. Both areas require correct membrane placement and continuous monitoring. What cooling temperatures are available?
The machine provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back, buttock fold, and suitable double-chin areas. How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes per area, depending on the applicator and selected protocol. How many sessions are recommended?
One to three sessions per area, commonly spaced four to six weeks apart. The final plan should follow professional reassessment. When may clients notice changes?
Thet visible changes may begin after approximately three to four weeks, with progressive changes developing over eight to twelve weeks. Is the treatment painful?
Clients commonly experience suction, strong cooling, pulling, and temporary numbness. Some clients may experience temporary discomfort during or after treatment. Is there downtime?
Many clients can resume normal activities after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness, tingling, cramping, or numbness may occur. Are treated fat cells permanently removed?
Fat cells processed after treatment do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with weight gain, and individual contour changes are not guaranteed to be permanent. Is cryolipolysis a weight-loss treatment?
No. Cryolipolysis is intended for localized body contouring and is not a treatment for obesity or a replacement for balanced nutrition and exercise. What results are supplied for this machine?
The supplied information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% in treated areas. These figures are not guaranteed and vary by client and protocol. What is an antifreeze membrane?
It is a protective barrier applied between the skin and cooling applicator. Correct placement and complete coverage are essential to reduce the risk of cold injury. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to tissue thickness, applicator fit, treatment settings, number of sessions, body composition, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator selection, dual-handle use, membrane placement, cooling and suction settings, aftercare, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 360° Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine enables slimming clinics, medical spas, and body-contouring professionals to provide dual-area controlled fat-freezing treatments. Five key benefits: 360° surround cooling applicator technology Dual-handle operation for simultaneous two-area treatment Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C Real-time temperature monitoring and antifreeze membrane protection CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
360° surround cryolipolysis
Controlled fat-freezing treatment
Cooling Range
5°C to −15°C
Adjustable treatment temperature
Handle Operation
Dual handle
Simultaneous two-area treatment
Applicators
Multiple sizes
Different body and submental areas
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes per area
Customized treatment planning
Treatment Course
Commonly one to three sessions per area
Progressive body-contouring program
Temperature Monitoring
Real-time
Treatment safety and consistency
Control System
10–12-inch touchscreen
Protocol and parameter management
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Applicator
Abdomen
Localized midsection contouring
Medium or large applicator
Waist and Flanks
Waistline and love-handle treatment
Suitable curved applicator
Upper Arms
Localized arm contouring
Small or medium applicator
Back and Bra Line
Targeted back-area treatment
Suitable medium applicator
Inner Thighs
Lower-body contouring
Small or medium applicator
Outer Thighs
Thigh-area body contouring
Suitable applicator
Buttock Fold
Localized contouring
Small or curved applicator
Double Chin
Submental-area treatment
Specialized small applicator
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine
Technology
360° surround cooling cryolipolysis
Cooling Range
5°C to −15°C adjustable
Handle Operation
Dual handle
Treatment Applicators
Multiple sizes, package-dependent
Primary Functions
Non-invasive fat reduction and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Double chin, arms, waist, abdomen, thighs, back, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes per area
Recommended Course
Commonly one to three sessions per area
Treatment Interval
Approximately four to six weeks
Results Timeline
Progressive changes over approximately three to twelve weeks
Display
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Temperature Monitoring
Real-time
Safety Features
Antifreeze membrane protection and intelligent controls
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
From $1,899.00
Professional High-Intensity Electromagnetic Body Sculpting System
Adjustable Muscle Stimulation for Customized Body-Conditioning Programs
The Emslim Gold Magnetic is a professional high-intensity electromagnetic muscle-stimulation platform developed for fitness centers, medical spas, wellness clinics and body-sculpting studios.
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in selected muscle groups. Adjustable intensity settings allow trained practitioners to create customized programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves.
Professional treatment courses can be incorporated into muscle-conditioning, body-contouring and fitness-support services.
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation | Adjustable intensity | Multiple body areas | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body-Sculpting Platform Electromagnetic Pulse Delivery
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through treatment applicators positioned over suitable muscle groups. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Gluteal muscle programs Thigh treatments Upper-arm stimulation Calf-muscle programs General body conditioning Repeated Muscle Contractions
Programmed electromagnetic energy produces repeated contractions in the targeted muscle group during a treatment session. Common applications include: Muscle-activation programs Core-conditioning support Muscle-toning services Fitness-oriented treatments Body-sculpting programs Maintenance sessions Muscle-Conditioning Support
Repeated contractions can be incorporated into professionally planned programs intended to support muscle tone and definition. Common applications include: Abdominal conditioning Gluteal muscle stimulation Thigh-muscle programs Upper-arm conditioning Calf-muscle stimulation General fitness support Body-Contour Support
The machine can be incorporated into broader body-contouring programs for appropriately selected clients. Common applications include: Abdomen and waist programs Buttock-contour support Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Post-weight-management body care Combination fitness services The appropriate applicator placement, intensity and session duration should be selected according to the muscle group, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized electromagnetic muscle-stimulation programs for different body areas. Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A muscle-conditioning program for suitable abdominal and core-muscle areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-conditioning support Abdomen contour programs General muscle-toning services Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Body-sculpting clients Busy professionals Appropriately assessed post-pregnancy clients Program 2: Buttocks and Gluteal Muscles
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscle groups. Recommended applications: Gluteal muscle stimulation Buttock-conditioning programs Muscle-tone support Lower-body body-sculpting services Recommended for: Fitness clients Body-contouring studios Wellness-center members Clients seeking lower-body conditioning Program 3: Thighs and Legs
A lower-body program for suitable thigh and calf muscle groups. Recommended applications: Quadriceps stimulation Hamstring programs Thigh conditioning Calf-muscle activation Recommended for: Athletes Fitness enthusiasts Lower-body conditioning programs Professional wellness services Program 4: Upper Arms
A targeted program for suitable biceps and triceps areas. Recommended applications: Biceps stimulation Triceps stimulation Upper-arm conditioning Muscle-tone support Recommended for: Fitness-center clients Upper-body programs Body-sculpting services Customized muscle-conditioning plans Adjustable Intensity for Customized Muscle Stimulation
The Emslim Gold Magnetic provides adjustable electromagnetic intensity for different muscle groups and client tolerance levels. The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over contraction intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with a lower intensity before the setting is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Multiple treatment applicators support professional muscle-stimulation programs across several body areas. Core and Upper-Body Treatments Abdomen Core muscles Biceps Triceps Other suitable upper-body muscle groups Lower-Body Treatments
Buttocks Quadriceps Hamstrings Thighs Calves Other suitable lower-body muscle groups Combined Body Programs
Abdomen and buttocks Abdomen and thighs Buttocks and thighs Upper arms Customized multi-area courses Maintenance-oriented programs Professional Muscle and Body-Conditioning Applications
The available treatments depend on applicator placement, intensity, session duration and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete health and fitness consultation should be performed before every treatment course. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment goals, recent procedures and contraindications. 2. Applicator Placement
The appropriate treatment applicators are positioned and secured over the selected muscle groups according to the operating protocol. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the treatment program, electromagnetic intensity and session duration according to the muscle group and client tolerance. 4. Electromagnetic Treatment
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in the selected muscles. A typical session lasts approximately 30 minutes per treatment area. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the applicators are removed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and recovery guidance. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness, soreness or cramping may occur following treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines adjustable electromagnetic technology with intuitive controls and professional treatment applicators. Key operating advantages include: High-intensity electromagnetic stimulation Programmed repeated contractions Adjustable treatment intensity Multiple body-area applicators 30-minute treatment programs LCD control interface Automatic safety controls Dual-voltage compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, electromagnetic treatment applicators and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Emslim Gold Magnetic main unit Professional electromagnetic treatment applicators Applicator-positioning straps Handle-connection components Required treatment cables Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-applicator setup Applicator-placement guidance Intensity-adjustment instructions Muscle-group treatment programs Client-positioning guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup LCD control operation Applicator installation Applicator placement by muscle group Intensity adjustment Abdomen and core programs Gluteal muscle programs Thigh and leg programs Upper-arm programs Client-comfort monitoring Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Emslim Gold Magnetic is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components LCD control system Electromagnetic energy components Original treatment applicators Applicator cables and connectors Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect applicator placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of straps, cables and external components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional high-intensity electromagnetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Epilepsy or uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe neurological conditions Active or suspected blood clots Hernia in the treatment area Recent surgery Open wounds or severe skin conditions Acute inflammation Severe muscle injury Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Post-pregnancy clients require appropriate medical clearance. Abdominal separation, recent delivery, cesarean recovery and pelvic-floor condition should be professionally assessed before treatment. The selected intensity must remain within the client’s tolerance throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Fitness centers Medical spas Wellness clinics Body-sculpting studios Beauty salons Sports and recovery centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their muscle-conditioning services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Emslim Gold Magnetic?
Provide Intensive Muscle Stimulation
The system delivers programmed electromagnetic pulses that produce repeated contractions in selected muscle groups. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Professional applicators support programs for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves. Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity settings allow treatments to be adapted to different muscle groups, fitness levels and client tolerance. Expand Your Service Menu
The system supports core-conditioning, gluteal, thigh, upper-arm, calf and comprehensive body-sculpting programs. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does Emslim Gold Magnetic work?
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic pulses through treatment applicators positioned over selected muscle groups. These pulses produce repeated muscle contractions during the session. What are supramaximal contractions?
The term describes intense, externally induced muscle contractions produced by electromagnetic stimulation. The contraction level depends on applicator placement and selected intensity. How many contractions occur during a session?
The supplied specification describes approximately 20,000–30,000 programmed contractions during a 30-minute session. Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, biceps, triceps and calves. How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30 minutes per treatment area. How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 6–8 sessions over 3–4 weeks. The final schedule depends on the client’s condition and professional assessment. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients feel repeated muscle contractions that can become intense as the setting increases. The intensity should remain within the client’s tolerance. Can muscle soreness occur?
Yes. Temporary muscle fatigue, tightness or soreness may occur, similar to the response after physical exercise. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness may occur. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, applicator placement, intensity adjustment, body-area programs, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation to Your Business
The Emslim Gold Magnetic combines: High-intensity electromagnetic stimulation Programmed repeated muscle contractions Adjustable treatment intensity Professional multi-area body-conditioning programs Three-year parts warranty and customer support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment applicators, muscle programs and professional training. Order Your Emslim Gold Magnetic and Request Pricing
Intensity Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Intensity
First-time clients and initial muscle activation
Moderate Intensity
General professional conditioning programs
Higher Intensity
Appropriately selected experienced clients
Customized Program
Muscle-specific settings based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Program
Intended Fitness Application
Abdomen
Core Program
Abdominal muscle stimulation
Deep core
Customized Program
Core-conditioning support
Buttocks
Gluteal Program
Gluteal muscle stimulation
Thighs
Lower-Body Program
Quadriceps and hamstring conditioning
Upper arms
Arm Program
Biceps and triceps stimulation
Calves
Lower-Leg Program
Calf-muscle activation
Multiple areas
Customized Course
Comprehensive body-conditioning support
Maintenance
Lower-Intensity Program
Ongoing muscle-stimulation services
Specification
Details
Product Name
Emslim Gold Magnetic
Product Type
Professional electromagnetic muscle-stimulation system
Technology
High-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Programmed Contractions
Up to approximately 20,000–30,000 contractions per session
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes per treatment area
Intensity Levels
Adjustable
Treatment Applicators
Multiple handles for different muscle groups
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, upper arms and calves
Control Interface
LCD screen with professional controls
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, client-safety sensors and overload protection
Design
Professional clinic and salon system
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
From $2,450.00
Professional RF and EMS Body Sculpting System
Four Treatment Handles for Simultaneous Muscle Stimulation and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova is a dual-technology body-sculpting platform developed for fitness clinics, medical spas, aesthetic centers and professional beauty salons.
The system combines radiofrequency energy with electromagnetic muscle stimulation. Four treatment handles allow trained operators to create customized protocols for the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back and gluteal areas.
Adjustable RF energy and EMS intensity provide treatment flexibility for different body areas, muscle groups, fitness levels and professional objectives.
RF and EMS technology | Four treatment handles | Multiple body areas | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Body Sculpting Platform Radiofrequency Energy
The RF function delivers controlled thermal energy to suitable body tissue while supporting professional skin-firming and contour-refinement programs. Common applications include: Skin-firming treatments Body-contour refinement Abdomen treatments Waist and flank programs Thigh treatments General body-care services Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function produces controlled muscle contractions in the selected treatment area. Common applications include: Muscle-stimulation programs Core-activation treatments Muscle-toning support Fitness-oriented services Body-conditioning programs Maintenance sessions Simultaneous RF and EMS Treatment
The system combines adjustable RF energy and electromagnetic stimulation within one professional platform. Common applications include: Combined body-sculpting programs Muscle stimulation with skin-firming support Abdomen and core treatments Thigh and gluteal programs Multi-session fitness packages Customized body-care services Four-Handle Multi-Area Treatment
Four treatment handles allow the operator to work on multiple suitable body areas during one session. Common applications include: Abdomen and flanks Left and right thighs Upper arms Back areas Gluteal muscles Customized multi-area programs The appropriate handle placement, RF setting, EMS intensity and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, muscle group, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Body Area The system supports customizable body-sculpting programs. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and client assessment. Program 1: Abdomen and Core
A body-sculpting program designed for the abdomen and suitable core-muscle areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-activation support Abdomen skin-firming programs Central body-contour refinement Recommended for: Fitness clinics Body-contouring studios Post-weight-management clients Clients seeking improved abdominal definition Program 2: Waist and Flanks
A targeted program for suitable areas around the waist and sides of the body. Recommended applications: Waist-contour refinement Flank treatments Side-body muscle stimulation Skin-firming support Recommended for: Waist-sculpting programs Multi-area packages Fitness-oriented treatments Aesthetic body-care services Program 3: Arms and Thighs
A customizable program for suitable upper-arm and thigh areas. Recommended applications: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Thigh-conditioning programs Skin-firming support General limb contouring Recommended for: Arm-toning services Lower-body programs Fitness-clinic clients Professional body-sculpting packages Program 4: Glutes and Back
A targeted program for suitable gluteal muscles and back areas. Recommended applications: Gluteal muscle stimulation Buttock-conditioning support Back muscle programs Body-contour refinement Recommended for: Glute-focused treatments Fitness and conditioning programs Multi-area body services Clinics expanding their treatment menu Dual-Energy Control for Customized Body Sculpting
The RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova provides adjustable RF energy and customizable EMS intensity. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment area, muscle group, client tolerance and professional objective. The adjustable controls give trained operators greater flexibility over thermal energy, muscle-stimulation intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with lower settings before RF energy or EMS intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Four treatment handles support individual and simultaneous multi-area protocols. Upper-Body Treatments
Upper arms Suitable back areas Flanks Side body Other professionally assessed areas Core and Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Core muscles Waist Thighs Gluteal muscles Multi-Area Treatments
Abdomen and flanks Left and right thighs Upper arms Glutes and thighs Customized four-handle placement Professional full-body programs Professional Body Sculpting Applications
The available treatments depend on handle placement, RF energy, EMS intensity, session duration and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, fitness level, treatment objectives and contraindications. Suitable treatment areas are then identified. 2. Handle Preparation
The required treatment areas are prepared according to the operating protocol. Conductive gel is applied where required, and the treatment handles are positioned and secured correctly. 3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the RF energy, EMS intensity, treatment duration and available preset program according to the treatment area and client tolerance. 4. RF and EMS Treatment
The system delivers controlled RF energy and electromagnetic muscle stimulation through the selected handles. A typical treatment session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the handles are removed and the treatment areas are cleaned. The client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary warmth, redness, muscle fatigue, tingling or soreness may occur following treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines intelligent touchscreen controls with four RF and EMS treatment handles for efficient professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Four RF and EMS treatment handles Simultaneous multi-area operation Adjustable RF energy Customizable EMS intensity Intelligent digital touchscreen Preset treatment protocols 20–30-minute sessions 110V–240V power compatibility Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment handles and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova control system Four RF and EMS treatment handles Handle-connection components Handle-positioning accessories Starter conductive gel Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup instructions Handle-placement guidance RF-energy selection EMS-intensity selection Body-treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Treatment-handle connections Handle placement and securing RF-energy adjustment EMS-intensity adjustment Treatment-program selection Multi-area protocols Client positioning Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova is supported by a three-year parts and labor warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Intelligent touchscreen Original treatment handles Handle-connection components RF and EMS control components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect handle placement or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cables and external components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional RF and electromagnetic muscle-stimulation equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Severe cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy Active or suspected blood clots Open wounds or active infections Severe skin conditions in the treatment area Recent surgery Abdominal or inguinal hernia Severe muscle or nerve disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Treatment handles must not be positioned over the head, front or side of the neck, heart, implanted devices or other prohibited areas. RF temperature, EMS intensity and client comfort must be monitored throughout the session. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Fitness clinics Medical spas Aesthetic clinics Professional beauty salons Body-contouring studios Gyms and wellness centers Trained body-sculpting practitioners Qualified healthcare professionals Businesses expanding their fitness services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova? Combine Two Technologies
The system combines adjustable radiofrequency energy and electromagnetic muscle stimulation in one professional platform. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Four treatment handles support individual or simultaneous protocols for the abdomen, flanks, arms, thighs, back and gluteal areas. Customize Every Session
Adjustable RF energy, EMS intensity and preset treatment programs allow sessions to be adapted to different body areas and client fitness levels. Expand Your Service Menu
The system can support muscle-stimulation programs, skin-firming services, body-contour treatments and fitness-oriented packages. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts and labor warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does the RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova work?
The system combines controlled radiofrequency energy with electromagnetic stimulation. RF supports thermal body-care and skin-firming programs, while EMS produces controlled contractions in selected muscle groups. How is this system different from an EMS-only machine?
An EMS-only machine provides muscle stimulation. The EMSlim Nova combines EMS with adjustable radiofrequency energy in one system for integrated muscle and body-care protocols. What does the four-handle design provide?
Four handles allow operators to treat multiple suitable body areas during one session. Handle placement depends on the selected protocol and client assessment. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, gluteal muscles and selected back areas. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. The exact duration depends on the treatment area, handle placement, selected program and professional protocol. How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 6–12 sessions. The final number and frequency depend on the client’s condition, goals and response. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients commonly feel warmth from RF energy and controlled muscle contractions from EMS. Settings should be adjusted to remain within the client’s tolerance. Can muscle soreness occur?
Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness may occur after treatment, particularly during the first sessions or when higher EMS intensity is used. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, fatigue or muscle soreness may occur. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers system setup, handle placement, RF settings, EMS intensity, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts and labor warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add RF and EMS Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova combines: Radiofrequency and EMS technology Four simultaneous treatment handles Adjustable energy and intensity controls Professional multi-area body applications Three-year warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment handles, professional protocols and training support. Order Your RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova and Request a Quote
Treatment Setting
Recommended Application
Lower RF and EMS Settings
First-time clients and comfort-focused programs
Moderate RF and EMS Settings
General body-sculpting and muscle-stimulation treatments
Higher EMS Intensity
Appropriately selected fitness-oriented muscle programs
Customized Dual Technology
Combined RF and EMS protocols for specific body areas
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
RF and EMS
Core stimulation and contour support
Waist and flanks
RF and EMS
Waist-contour refinement
Upper arms
RF and EMS
Muscle stimulation and skin-firming support
Thighs
RF and EMS
Lower-body conditioning
Gluteal muscles
EMS with adjustable RF
Muscle-stimulation and contour programs
Back
RF and EMS
Muscle-conditioning and body-care support
Multiple body areas
Four-handle operation
Simultaneous professional treatment
Fitness clients
Customized dual technology
Body-conditioning programs
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty RF 4 Handles EMSlim Nova
Product Type
Professional RF and EMS body-sculpting system
Technology
Radiofrequency and electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Treatment Handles
Four RF and EMS handles
Functions
Muscle stimulation, skin-firming support and body-contour refinement
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, flanks, arms, thighs, back and glutes
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Suggested Treatment Course
Approximately 6–12 sessions according to professional assessment
RF Energy
Adjustable
EMS Intensity
Customizable for different muscle groups and fitness levels
Control Interface
Intelligent digital touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Preset and adjustable professional protocols
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and stimulation limits
Power Supply
110V–240V
Warranty
Three-year parts and labor warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
$2,169.00
Professional Six-Handle Cryolipolysis and Cavitation System Dual-Technology Platform for Multi-Area Fat Reduction and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine is a professional body-contouring system that combines 360° fat-freezing technology with 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation. Its six-handle configuration supports simultaneous treatment across multiple suitable body areas. Small, medium, large, chin, arm, and thigh applicators allow professionals to create customized programs for different anatomical areas and client objectives. With adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C, 40K–80K cavitation, optional RF and vacuum functions, real-time temperature monitoring, and a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, the system is designed for premium body-contouring clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, and high-volume wellness facilities. 360° cryolipolysis | 40K–80K cavitation | Six-handle operation | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform 360° Cryolipolysis Cooling
The cryolipolysis function delivers controlled cooling around suitable subcutaneous tissue held within the applicator chamber. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Waist and flank contouring Upper-arm programs Inner- and outer-thigh treatments Back and bra-line treatments Suitable submental-area treatments 40K–80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The cavitation function delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas as part of a professional contouring program. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Waistline treatments Thigh programs Upper-arm contouring Buttock-area treatments Cellulite-appearance programs Optional Radiofrequency and Vacuum
Available RF and vacuum functions can support skin-firming, tissue-massage, and combined body-care programs. Common applications include: Body skin-firming treatments Vacuum massage Tissue mobilization Cellulite-appearance care Post-cavitation RF treatments Combined body-contouring programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Cryolipolysis Fat-Freezing Program
Uses the appropriate 360° cooling applicator for targeted treatment of suitable subcutaneous tissue. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Waist and flank treatments Back and bra-line programs Upper-arm contouring Thigh-area treatments Recommended for: Clients with suitable pinchable subcutaneous fat Clients seeking localized body contouring Clients with stable and realistic treatment goals Ultrasonic Cavitation Program
Uses the selected 40K–80K cavitation configuration for professional body-contouring treatments. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist programs Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area treatments Cellulite-appearance care Recommended for: Clients suitable for ultrasonic body treatments Clients seeking non-invasive contouring Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits Combined Cryolipolysis and Cavitation Program
Incorporates both technologies within a professionally planned treatment course or suitable sequence. Recommended applications: Multi-stage body contouring Abdomen and thigh programs Waist and flank treatments Cellulite-appearance care Comprehensive body-shaping programs Recommended for: Clients suitable for both technologies Clients with several treatment objectives Clinics offering advanced combination services Multi-Area Treatment Program
Uses the six-handle configuration to treat several suitable areas during the same professionally monitored appointment. Recommended applications: Abdomen and thighs Arms and waist Bilateral thigh treatment Back and flank programs Customized multi-area treatments Recommended for: Clients requiring several treatment areas High-volume professional facilities Clients receiving comprehensive body-contouring programs Adjustable Cooling, Cavitation, and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected technology, applicator, treatment area, and client tolerance. Cooling temperature, suction, cavitation frequency, treatment duration, and technology sequence should follow the supplied protocols and professional assessment. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen, Waist, and Flanks
Different applicator sizes and treatment technologies support customized midsection programs. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-abdomen contouring Lower-abdomen contouring Waistline definition Love-handle treatments General midsection shaping Arms, Back, and Buttocks
Suitable handles can be selected for localized upper-body and posterior body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Bra-line treatments Upper- and lower-back programs Buttock-area treatments Cellulite-appearance care Thighs and Double Chin
Specialized applicators support professionally assessed lower-body and submental treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Inner-thigh contouring Outer-thigh treatments Upper-leg shaping Double-chin-area contouring Bilateral lower-body programs Professional Treatment Applications The exact applicator and technology should be selected according to client suitability and the supplied professional protocols. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, body-contouring objectives, target areas, previous procedures, implants, skin condition, and possible contraindications for cryolipolysis, cavitation, RF, and vacuum. Step 2: Technology and Applicator Selection
Select cryolipolysis, cavitation, or a suitable combination. Choose applicators that match the tissue size, shape, and anatomical location. Step 3: Skin Protection and Setup
For cryolipolysis, apply a new approved antifreeze membrane over each complete treatment area. For cavitation or RF, apply the appropriate conductive treatment medium. Step 4: Active Treatment
Begin the selected program for approximately 30–60 minutes. Monitor temperature, applicator contact, suction, skin response, and client comfort throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the applicators and treatment medium, inspect the skin, and perform the recommended massage when appropriate. Document the settings and provide aftercare guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine combines dual-technology body contouring with simultaneous multi-area capability. Key advantages include: Professional 360° cryolipolysis technology 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation Six-handle configuration Simultaneous multi-area treatment Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C Small, medium, large, chin, arm, and thigh applicators Optional RF and vacuum functions Treatments for multiple body areas 12-inch intelligent touchscreen Real-time temperature monitoring Antifreeze membrane protection Approximately 30–60-minute sessions 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes because individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation main unit 6 × Treatment applicators Small, medium, and large applicator configurations Chin applicator Arm applicator Thigh applicator Integrated 40K–80K cavitation function Optional RF and vacuum functions according to configuration Applicator connection hoses and cables 12-inch intelligent touchscreen Real-time temperature-monitoring system Antifreeze membranes and treatment-medium starter supply 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card The final handle allocation and optional RF or vacuum configuration should follow the selected product package. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Cryolipolysis applicator-selection guidance Multi-handle operation guidance Antifreeze membrane guidance Cooling-temperature and suction guidance 40K–80K cavitation protocols Optional RF and vacuum protocols Body-area treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Aftercare instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Tissue and treatment-area assessment Cryolipolysis applicator selection Six-handle treatment planning Correct antifreeze membrane placement Cooling-temperature and suction adjustment Cavitation frequency and operation Optional RF and vacuum operation Combined-treatment planning Client monitoring Post-treatment massage Aftercare guidance Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Antifreeze membranes, treatment gels, applicator seals, hoses, filters, conductive media, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, cold injury caused by incorrect membrane placement, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation and health-history review must be completed before every treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Cryolipolysis may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Cryoglobulinemia Cold agglutinin disease Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria Severe cold sensitivity or cold urticaria Raynaud’s disease or serious circulation disorders Active hernia within or near the treatment area Active infection or open wounds Reduced or impaired sensation Recent surgery within the treatment area Cavitation, RF, or vacuum may not be suitable for clients with: Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Serious liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Active cancer or tumors Severe skin conditions Medical conditions requiring physician supervision The system is intended for localized body contouring and should not be presented as a treatment for obesity or a replacement for weight management. Cryolipolysis carries risks, including cold injury, prolonged numbness, bruising, contour irregularity, pain, and rare paradoxical adipose hyperplasia. Clients must receive appropriate risk information and provide informed consent. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, hoses, seals, cables, and accessories before use. Screen the client for every selected technology. Select the correct applicator and treatment mode. Use a new approved antifreeze membrane for each cryolipolysis application. Ensure each membrane covers the complete cooling area. Use the correct conductive medium for cavitation or RF. Begin with professionally selected settings. Monitor temperature, applicator contact, suction, skin condition, and comfort. Monitor every active treatment area continuously. Keep cavitation and RF handpieces moving during treatment. Do not treat prohibited or unsuitable anatomical areas. Record applicators, technologies, settings, duration, and treatment areas. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin changes occur. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Premium body-contouring clinics Slimming centers Medical spas Beauty salons Wellness centers Aesthetic clinics Professional spas High-volume treatment facilities Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing cryolipolysis, cavitation, RF, or vacuum treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine? Dual Body-Contouring Technologies
The system combines 360° cryolipolysis with 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation on one professional platform. Six-Handle Multi-Area Operation
Six specialized applicators support simultaneous treatment across multiple suitable body areas. Optional RF and Vacuum Functions
Available configurations can add skin-firming, suction massage, and combined body-care services. Intelligent Monitoring and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen, real-time temperature monitoring, and antifreeze membrane protocols support professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, multi-handle protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine?
It is a professional body-contouring system combining 360° cryolipolysis, 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation, and six-handle multi-area operation. What is the difference between cryolipolysis and cavitation?
Cryolipolysis uses controlled cooling on suitable subcutaneous fat tissue. Cavitation delivers ultrasonic energy as part of a professional body-contouring program. Can cryolipolysis and cavitation be combined?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive both technologies within a professionally designed course or treatment sequence. Compatibility and timing should follow the supplied protocols. Why does the machine have six handles?
The six-handle configuration provides different applicator sizes and supports simultaneous treatment across multiple suitable body areas. Can all six handles operate simultaneously?
The supplied product information describes simultaneous multi-area operation. The number and combination of active handles should follow the machine configuration, operating manual, and professional training. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and suitable double-chin areas. What cooling temperatures are available?
The cryolipolysis function provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C. What cavitation frequencies are available?
The machine provides ultrasonic cavitation within the supplied 40K–80K range. How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the selected technology, number of areas, and professional protocol. How many sessions are recommended?
One to three sessions per area, commonly spaced four to six weeks apart. Cavitation frequency should follow its separate professional protocol. When may clients notice changes?
The changes may become visible after approximately three to four weeks, with progressive changes over eight to twelve weeks. Is the treatment painful?
Cryolipolysis commonly produces suction, strong cooling, pulling, and temporary numbness. Cavitation generally produces vibration and may create an audible sensation. Individual comfort varies. Is there downtime?
Many clients can resume normal activities after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness, tingling, cramping, or numbness may occur. Are treated fat cells permanently removed?
Fat cells processed after cryolipolysis do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with weight gain, and individual contour changes are not guaranteed to be permanent. Is this a weight-loss machine?
No. The system is intended for localized body contouring and is not a treatment for obesity or a replacement for nutrition, exercise, or medical weight management. What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures are not guaranteed and vary by client and protocol. Are RF and vacuum included?
RF and vacuum are listed as optional functions. Their inclusion should be confirmed when selecting the final machine configuration. What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers cryolipolysis, cavitation, multi-handle operation, membrane placement, cooling and suction settings, optional RF and vacuum functions, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Dual-Technology Multi-Area Body Contouring to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine enables premium clinics, medical spas, and slimming centers to provide cryolipolysis and cavitation treatments across multiple suitable body areas. Five key benefits: 360° cryolipolysis and 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation Six specialized handles for multi-area treatments Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C A 12-inch touchscreen with real-time temperature monitoring CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, handle configuration, optional RF and vacuum functions, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Cryolipolysis Technology
360° surround cooling
Controlled fat-freezing treatment
Cooling Range
5°C to −15°C
Adjustable cooling temperature
Cavitation Frequency
40K–80K
Ultrasonic body-contouring programs
Treatment Handles
Six
Multi-area treatment capability
Optional Functions
RF and vacuum
Skin-firming and massage support
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Customized treatment planning
Treatment Course
Commonly one to three sessions per area
Progressive body-contouring program
Control System
12-inch touchscreen
Protocol and parameter management
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Technology or Applicator
Abdomen
Localized midsection contouring
Cryolipolysis or cavitation
Waist and Flanks
Waistline and love-handle treatment
Suitable cryolipolysis applicator
Upper Arms
Localized arm contouring
Arm applicator or cavitation
Back and Bra Line
Targeted back-area treatment
Suitable cryolipolysis applicator
Inner Thighs
Lower-body contouring
Thigh applicator
Outer Thighs
Thigh contouring and texture care
Cryolipolysis or cavitation
Buttocks
Contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Cavitation and optional RF
Double Chin
Submental-area treatment
Specialized chin applicator
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine
Core Technologies
360° cryolipolysis and ultrasonic cavitation
Cooling Range
5°C to −15°C adjustable
Cavitation Frequency
40K–80K
Additional Functions
Optional RF and vacuum
Treatment Handles
Six
Applicator Types
Small, medium, large, chin, arm, and thigh
Operation
Simultaneous multi-area treatment
Primary Functions
Fat reduction, body contouring, cellulite-appearance care, and skin-firming support
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and double chin
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Recommended Course
Commonly one to three sessions per area
Treatment Interval
Approximately four to six weeks for cryolipolysis
Display
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Temperature Monitoring
Real-time
Safety Features
Antifreeze membranes and intelligent monitoring
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$999.00
Professional RF Microneedling Device
Controlled-Depth Skin Rejuvenation, Collagen Remodeling, and Tightening System
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is a professional skin-rejuvenation system combining controlled-depth microneedling with radiofrequency energy.
Adjustable microneedles penetrate the skin at depths from 0.5mm to 4.0mm while delivering controlled RF energy into the targeted tissue. This dual action supports the skin’s natural renewal response and stimulates collagen and elastin remodeling.
With four interchangeable cartridge options, adjustable RF intensity, intelligent touchscreen controls, and both facial and body applications, the system is designed for dermatology practices, medical spas, and advanced aesthetic clinics operating within local professional requirements.
Microneedling and RF | 0.5–4.0mm Adjustable Depth | Four Cartridge Options | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform Controlled-Depth Microneedling
The device creates controlled microchannels at carefully selected depths. This process supports the skin’s natural repair response and encourages collagen and elastin production. Common applications include: Fine-line and wrinkle treatments Acne-scar improvement Surgical-scar treatments Stretch-mark improvement Enlarged-pore care Skin-texture refinement Radiofrequency Dermal Heating
RF energy is delivered through the microneedles into the selected tissue depth. This controlled thermal action supports deeper collagen remodeling while limiting unnecessary surface exposure. Common applications include: Skin-tightening treatments Collagen-remodeling programs Firmness and elasticity support Facial and neck rejuvenation Texture improvement Body skin-firming treatments Interchangeable Cartridge Technology
Four cartridge configurations allow professionals to adapt treatments to delicate facial zones, complete facial areas, the neck and décolleté, or larger body regions. Common applications include: Precision under-eye treatments Full-face rejuvenation Face and neck protocols Décolleté treatments Abdominal stretch-mark care Thigh and arm rejuvenation Select the Right Program for Each Client Anti-Aging and Skin-Tightening Program
A professional facial-rejuvenation protocol designed to address fine lines, wrinkles, reduced elasticity, and skin laxity. Recommended applications: Face, jawline, neck, and décolleté. Recommended for: Suitable clients seeking improved firmness, smoother-looking skin, and progressive collagen remodeling. Scar and Texture-Refinement Program
A customized microneedling and RF protocol developed to improve the appearance of acne scars, selected surgical scars, and uneven texture. Recommended applications: Face and compatible body areas containing fully healed scars. Recommended for: Clients seeking gradual improvement in scar appearance, texture, and overall skin smoothness. Stretch-Mark and Body-Rejuvenation Program
A larger-area protocol using the appropriate cartridge and needle depth for body skin concerns. Recommended applications: Abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients seeking improvement in the appearance of stretch marks, uneven body texture, or reduced skin firmness. Maintenance and Collagen-Support Program
A follow-up treatment designed to support previously achieved rejuvenation results and continued collagen stimulation. Recommended applications: Previously treated facial or body areas. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and require periodic maintenance based on professional assessment. Adjustable Needle Depth and RF Treatment Settings
Needle depth and RF intensity must be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area, sensitivity, medical history, and applicable professional protocol. Deeper settings are not automatically better and should only be used when clinically appropriate. Adjustable Treatment Areas Facial Areas
The 10-pin and 25-pin cartridges support precision and full-face treatments across suitable facial zones. Treatment objectives include: Fine-line reduction Wrinkle improvement Acne-scar care Enlarged-pore refinement Skin-texture improvement Firmness and elasticity support More even-looking skin tone Neck and Décolleté Areas
The 25-pin or 36-pin cartridge can support carefully controlled treatments across suitable neck and upper-chest areas. Treatment objectives include: Neck-line improvement Skin-firming support Décolleté rejuvenation Texture refinement Collagen stimulation Improved elasticity Body Areas
The 36-pin and 49-pin cartridges provide wider coverage for compatible body-treatment zones. Treatment objectives include: Stretch-mark improvement Abdominal skin rejuvenation Thigh-texture refinement Upper-arm firming Selected scar treatments Smoother-looking body skin Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s skin concerns, medical history, medications, previous procedures, healing response, sun exposure, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Skin Assessment
Evaluate skin type, treatment area, concern severity, sensitivity, and suitability. Select the appropriate cartridge, needle depth, RF intensity, and treatment pattern. Step 3: Skin Preparation
Cleanse and disinfect the treatment area according to clinical protocol. Apply a suitable topical anesthetic when professionally indicated and permitted, then remove it completely before treatment. Step 4: Controlled RF Microneedling Treatment
Install a new sterile cartridge, confirm the selected settings, and perform the treatment using consistent passes and controlled coverage. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Apply professionally appropriate post-treatment products and provide written aftercare instructions covering sun protection, cleansing, hydration, skincare restrictions, and expected temporary reactions. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device combines adjustable depth, controlled RF intensity, four cartridge options, and intelligent operation for professional skin-rejuvenation services. Key advantages include: Combined microneedling and RF technology Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm needle depth Adjustable radiofrequency intensity Four interchangeable cartridge configurations Precision facial and larger body applications Approximately 20–40-minute sessions Structured 3–6-session treatment courses Intelligent touchscreen operation 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications Treatment response, downtime, improvement timeline, and result duration vary according to skin condition, age, treatment depth, RF intensity, treatment course, healing response, lifestyle, sun exposure, and aftercare compliance. Results should not be presented as guaranteed. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device Compatible professional treatment handpiece Multiple interchangeable needle cartridges 10-pin cartridge configuration 25-pin cartridge configuration 36-pin cartridge configuration 49-pin cartridge configuration 1 × Compatible power cable Standard operating accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Touchscreen operating instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Needle-depth guidance RF-setting guidance Treatment-protocol information Contraindication and safety instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional operator training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help qualified users understand the machine’s setup, treatment settings, cartridge selection, and maintenance requirements. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Intelligent touchscreen operation Treatment-handpiece preparation Sterile cartridge installation Cartridge selection by treatment area Needle-depth adjustment RF-intensity selection Treatment-pattern guidance Client consultation and skin assessment Contraindication screening Infection-control procedures Post-treatment care Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Training supplied with the machine does not replace any professional license, medical supervision, infection-control qualification, or legal authorization required in the operator’s location. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising under normal professional operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before repair guidance or replacement parts are supplied. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed description of the technical problem. Submit clear photographs or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the issue. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect operation or treatment setup Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Liquid damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow cleaning and maintenance instructions Use of incompatible cartridges or accessories Normal wear of handpieces, cables, and consumable components Used or disposable needle cartridges Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
RF microneedling is a professional procedure requiring appropriate training, infection-control practices, and compliance with local licensing or medical-supervision requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Active skin infection Herpes outbreak Open wounds or sores Active inflammation in the treatment area Recent sunburn or excessive sun exposure Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Severe keloid-scarring tendency Blood-clotting or bleeding disorders Current anticoagulant treatment without medical clearance Autoimmune conditions affecting healing Uncontrolled diabetes Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Recent isotretinoin use Reduced skin sensation Poor wound-healing history Recent injectable or surgical treatment in the area Any condition requiring professional medical clearance A waiting period of approximately 6–12 months after isotretinoin use may be appropriate, but the client must follow the advice of their prescribing healthcare professional. Operating Precautions
Complete a detailed consultation and skin assessment. Confirm the operator is legally permitted to perform RF microneedling. Obtain informed consent before treatment. Document the client’s medical history and current medications. Examine the skin for infection, wounds, irritation, and recent sun exposure. Use a new, sterile, single-use needle cartridge for every client and session. Never reuse disposable needle cartridges. Clean and disinfect the handpiece and treatment environment properly. Select needle depth according to the treatment area and concern. Adjust RF intensity according to skin response and tolerance. Do not assume that deeper penetration produces better results. Monitor the skin continuously during treatment. Stop treatment if an unexpected reaction occurs. Avoid overlapping passes beyond the professional protocol. Follow appropriate sharps-disposal procedures. Provide complete written aftercare guidance. Maintain accurate treatment records. Follow all local infection-control and clinical-waste requirements. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device is intended for appropriately qualified users, which may include: Dermatology practices Medical spas Aesthetic medical clinics Licensed healthcare professionals Physicians Qualified nurses or nurse practitioners Properly trained aesthetic practitioners under required supervision Advanced beauty clinics where legally permitted Licensing, supervision, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements vary by location. Buyers and operators are responsible for confirming all applicable local requirements before providing treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device? 1. Combined Microneedling and RF Technology
The system combines controlled micro-injury with targeted RF energy to support both surface renewal and deeper collagen remodeling. 2. Adjustable 0.5–4.0mm Needle Depth
Variable penetration enables qualified professionals to adapt treatments to different skin concerns, areas, and protocols. 3. Four Specialized Cartridge Options
The 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin configurations support precision facial work, full-face rejuvenation, extended areas, and body treatments. 4. Facial and Body Treatment Capability
One platform supports treatments for the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The device includes CE and ISO certificates, professional operating guidance, technical support, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does RF microneedling work?
The device inserts microneedles at a controlled depth while delivering RF energy into the targeted tissue. Microneedling supports the skin’s natural repair response, while RF heating promotes deeper collagen and elastin remodeling. Q: How is RF microneedling different from standard microneedling?
Standard microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling adds thermal energy at the selected tissue depth, providing an additional collagen-remodeling and skin-firming action. Q: What needle depths are available?
The needle depth is adjustable from approximately 0.5mm to 4.0mm. Q: Is the same needle depth used for every treatment?
No. Depth must be selected according to the treatment area, skin thickness, concern, client sensitivity, and professional protocol. Q: Which cartridges are included?
The system includes 10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin cartridge options. Q: What is the 10-pin cartridge used for?
The 10-pin cartridge supports precise treatment of small or delicate areas, including selected under-eye, nose, mouth, and small-scar applications. Q: What is the 25-pin cartridge used for?
The 25-pin cartridge is designed for standard full-face rejuvenation, wrinkle care, skin tightening, and general texture improvement. Q: What is the 36-pin cartridge used for?
The 36-pin cartridge provides wider coverage for the face, neck, décolleté, and other extended treatment zones. Q: What is the 49-pin cartridge used for?
The 49-pin cartridge supports larger body areas such as the abdomen, thighs, and upper arms, including stretch-mark treatments. Q: Which skin concerns can the machine address?
Professional applications include fine lines, wrinkles, acne scars, selected surgical scars, stretch marks, enlarged pores, reduced firmness, and uneven texture. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and upper arms. Q: How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, excluding consultation, cleansing, and topical-anesthetic time. Q: Is topical anesthetic required?
A topical anesthetic may be used when professionally appropriate and legally permitted. The operator must follow the product instructions and local requirements. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Client experience varies. With suitable preparation and correctly selected settings, most clients describe temporary pressure, warmth, or prickling rather than severe pain. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A typical starting course includes approximately 3–6 sessions. Q: How far apart should treatments be scheduled?
Sessions are commonly spaced approximately 4–6 weeks apart to allow the skin to recover and remodel. Q: Is there downtime?
Temporary redness, sensitivity, or mild swelling may last approximately 1–2 days. Recovery varies according to the treatment depth, RF intensity, area, and individual response. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients notice early texture improvements after initial sessions. Collagen remodeling develops gradually, with more visible changes commonly appearing over several weeks. Q: How long can results last?
The supplied estimate is approximately 12–18 months with suitable skincare and maintenance. Individual result duration varies. Q: Is RF microneedling suitable for every skin tone?
Adjustable settings may allow trained professionals to treat a broad range of skin tones. However, suitability and settings must be determined through an individual assessment. Q: Can active acne be treated?
Treatment should not be performed over active infection, open lesions, or significant inflammation. The client should be assessed by an appropriately qualified professional. Q: Can the device be used on scars?
It can support treatments for fully healed acne scars and selected surgical scars. Active wounds and incompletely healed tissue must not be treated. Q: Are cartridges reusable?
Needle cartridges should be sterile and single-use. A new cartridge must be used for every client and every treatment session. Q: What aftercare is recommended?
Clients should follow the professional aftercare plan, use broad-spectrum SPF 30 or higher, avoid harsh skincare for approximately 3–5 days, and avoid swimming, saunas, and excessive heat for at least 48 hours. Q: Who can operate the device?
The operator must have the qualifications, training, licensing, supervision, and insurance required in the location where treatments are provided. Q: Does training come with the machine?
Yes. Professional machine-operation and treatment guidance are included. This training does not replace legally required clinical qualifications or licenses. Q: What certificates are included?
The device is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Clinic
The Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device provides qualified clinics and aesthetic professionals with an adjustable platform for skin rejuvenation, collagen remodeling, wrinkle care, scar improvement, stretch-mark treatments, and skin tightening. Five key benefits: Combined microneedling and radiofrequency technology Adjustable needle depth from 0.5mm to 4.0mm Four interchangeable cartridge configurations Facial, neck, décolleté, and body applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, professional training details, and technical support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Needle Depth
Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
Adapts penetration to the skin concern, treatment area, and professional protocol
RF Intensity
Adjustable energy control
Customizes thermal delivery according to skin condition and tolerance
10-Pin Cartridge
Precision cartridge
Treats small and delicate facial areas
25-Pin Cartridge
Standard facial cartridge
Supports complete facial rejuvenation
36-Pin Cartridge
Extended-coverage cartridge
Treats the face, neck, and décolleté efficiently
49-Pin Cartridge
Large-area body cartridge
Supports stretch-mark and body-rejuvenation treatments
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Allows sessions to be adapted to the treatment area
Treatment Course
Approximately 3–6 sessions
Supports progressive collagen remodeling
Session Interval
Approximately 4–6 weeks
Allows suitable skin-recovery time between treatments
Control Interface
Intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient depth, intensity, and program control
Power Supply
110V/220V compatibility
Supports use in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Fine-Line Treatment
Face and eye contour
Improve the appearance of superficial lines
Wrinkle Reduction
Face and neck
Support collagen remodeling and smoother-looking skin
Acne-Scar Care
Face
Improve the appearance of fully healed acne scars
Surgical-Scar Care
Suitable healed scars
Support gradual texture remodeling
Skin Tightening
Face, neck, abdomen, and arms
Improve the appearance of firmness and elasticity
Pore Refinement
Face
Reduce the visible appearance of enlarged pores
Texture Improvement
Face and body
Support smoother and more even-looking skin
Stretch-Mark Care
Abdomen, thighs, and arms
Improve the appearance of stretch marks
Décolleté Rejuvenation
Upper chest
Address texture, lines, and reduced firmness
Collagen Maintenance
Previously treated areas
Support ongoing skin-renewal programs
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty RF Microneedling Device
Technology
Controlled-depth microneedling and radiofrequency energy
Needle-Depth Range
Adjustable from 0.5mm to 4.0mm
RF Energy
Adjustable intensity control
Cartridge Options
10-pin, 25-pin, 36-pin, and 49-pin
10-Pin Application
Under-eye area, nose, mouth area, small scars, and precision treatments
25-Pin Application
Standard full-face rejuvenation and wrinkle treatments
36-Pin Application
Face, neck, décolleté, and extended treatment zones
49-Pin Application
Abdomen, thighs, arms, stretch marks, and larger body areas
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, décolleté, abdomen, thighs, and arms
Primary Functions
Skin rejuvenation, wrinkle reduction, scar care, stretch-mark improvement, skin tightening, pore refinement, and texture improvement
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 3–6 sessions
Recommended Interval
Approximately 4–6 weeks
Expected Downtime
Commonly 1–2 days of temporary redness or swelling
Results Duration
Supplied estimate of approximately 12–18 months with suitable maintenance
Display and Controls
Intelligent touchscreen interface
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$1,799.00
Professional 4D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound for Skin Tightening, Facial Lifting, and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine is a professional non-invasive aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments. High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Its multi-depth cartridge system supports customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas. With treatment depths from 1.5mm to 13mm, eight treatment cartridges, adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and professional wellness centers. 4D HIFU technology | 1.5–13mm treatment depths | Eight cartridges | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Different cartridges allow professionals to target superficial, middle, and deeper tissue levels. Common applications include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line and wrinkle care Jawline contouring Neck and décolletage treatments Body skin-firming programs Professional body-contouring treatments Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
Facial cartridges are designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at depths suitable for different layers of facial tissue. Common applications include: Reduced facial firmness Fine lines and wrinkles Lower-face laxity Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatments Neck skin tightening Body Contouring and Skin Firming
Deeper cartridge configurations support professional treatments for suitable body areas. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Cellulite-appearance improvement Select the Right Program for Each Client Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Reduced facial firmness Uneven-looking skin texture Early signs of aging General collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation Clients concerned about visible signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition. Recommended applications: Lower-face laxity Reduced jawline definition Jowl-area treatments Double-chin concerns Neck skin tightening Recommended for: Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face Clients concerned about facial contours Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized body areas Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program. Recommended applications: Facial-lifting maintenance Skin-firming maintenance Body-contour maintenance Continued collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Returning HIFU clients Clients completing an initial treatment plan Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine provides multiple treatment depths for different facial and body applications. Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face, Chin, and Jawline
Facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable areas of the face. Common treatment objectives include: Facial lifting Fine-line care Wrinkle reduction Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatment Neck and Décolletage
Suitable cartridge depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs. Common treatment objectives include: Neck skin tightening Reduced appearance of neck lines Improved-looking firmness Décolletage rejuvenation Collagen-stimulation support Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Abdomen treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin firming Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance. Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance. Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with straightforward professional operation. Key advantages include: Professional 4D HIFU technology Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 13mm Eight-cartridge package Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable energy settings Intelligent touchscreen controls Approximately 30–60-minute sessions Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs Jawline and chin contouring Neck and décolletage treatments Body-contouring and skin-firming programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty 4D HIFU main unit 1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece 8 × Treatment cartridges Facial treatment cartridge configurations Body treatment cartridge configurations Intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Facial treatment protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Facial and body assessment Treatment-area mapping Cartridge selection Energy-level adjustment Handpiece positioning Facial-lifting protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Post-treatment care Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Active skin infection Herpes, open wounds, or sores Active eczema, psoriasis, or dermatitis in the area Severe or recent sunburn Recent surgery within the treatment area Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments Serious cardiovascular or medical conditions Reduced or impaired skin sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. An appropriate waiting period should be determined by a qualified practitioner. HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use. Confirm the cartridge and treatment depth before beginning. Map the treatment area carefully. Apply sufficient ultrasound gel. Begin with conservative energy settings. Monitor client comfort and tissue response. Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas. Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol. Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring clinics Professional spas Anti-aging treatment centers Wellness facilities Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine? Multi-Depth HIFU Technology
Treatment depths spanning 1.5mm to 13mm support superficial facial treatments, deeper facial lifting, and selected body applications. Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. Eight Treatment Cartridges
The eight-cartridge package supports different treatment depths and allows professionals to select suitable configurations for facial and body areas. Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the target area and client. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments. What does 4D HIFU mean?
The product uses an advanced multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at different facial and body treatment depths. Which treatment depths are available?
The supplied information lists 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm facial depths, together with 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, and 13.0mm body depths. How many cartridges are included?
The supplied product package includes eight treatment cartridges for facial and body applications. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, chin, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. How long does one treatment take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and selected protocol. How many treatments are recommended?
The supplied information suggests one to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition, objectives, and professional assessment. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect following treatment. Progressive changes may continue as the skin’s natural collagen response develops. Individual outcomes and timing vary. How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response. Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur. What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as ultrasound energy is delivered. Energy should be adjusted according to professional protocol and client tolerance. Can the machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the upper arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 4D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and wellness professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services using one professional platform. Five key benefits: Multi-depth focused ultrasound treatments from 1.5mm to 13mm Professional facial and body treatment capability Eight treatment cartridges with adjustable energy settings Intelligent touchscreen controls with dual-voltage compatibility CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cartridge configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Treatment Depth
General Treatment Level
Possible Applications
1.5mm
Superficial facial tissue
Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas
3.0mm
Dermal facial layer
Collagen stimulation and skin tightening
4.5mm
Deeper facial layer
Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments
6.0mm
Shallow body treatment
Small body areas and skin-firming programs
8.0mm
Medium body treatment
Arms and selected body areas
10.0mm
Deeper body treatment
Abdomen, thighs, and body contouring
13.0mm
Maximum listed body depth
Larger body areas and professional contouring protocols
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Depth Category
Face
Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care
1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm
Chin and Jawline
Contour definition and lower-face tightening
Suitable facial depth
Neck
Skin tightening and line care
Suitable facial depth
Décolletage
Texture and firmness improvement
Professionally selected depth
Upper Arms
Skin firming and contouring
Suitable body depth
Abdomen
Body contouring and tightening
Suitable deeper body depth
Thighs
Contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Suitable body depth
Buttocks
Skin-firming and contouring support
Suitable body depth
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine
Technology
4D High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Treatment Package
Eight multi-depth cartridges
Listed Treatment Depths
1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, and 13.0mm
Facial Depths
1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm
Body Depths
6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, and 13.0mm
Primary Functions
Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Treatment Frequency
Personalized according to client assessment
Energy Settings
Adjustable
Display
Intelligent touchscreen
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,599.00
Professional RF Microneedling and Skin-Remodeling System
Fractional Radiofrequency Technology for Skin Tightening, Collagen Stimulation, and Body Contouring
The Morpheus 8 is a professional fractional radiofrequency microneedling system developed for facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, texture improvement, scar treatments, and body-contouring programs.
The system combines precision microneedling with controlled radiofrequency energy. Microneedles create fractional microchannels while delivering RF energy into selected tissue depths, supporting collagen and elastin remodeling below the skin’s surface.
With a 500W maximum power output, adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth, four cartridge options, and a 10.4-inch control screen, the system can be customized for delicate facial areas, deeper facial treatments, and larger body areas.
Fractional RF microneedling | 0.2–7.0mm adjustable depth | Four cartridge options | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform Fractional Microneedling
Precision-engineered needle cartridges create controlled microchannels within the selected treatment area. This fractional process supports the skin’s natural renewal response while leaving surrounding tissue untreated. Common applications include: Fine-line treatments Wrinkle-reduction programs Enlarged-pore treatments Uneven skin-texture improvement Acne-scar treatments General facial rejuvenation Body skin-renewal programs Radiofrequency Energy
The system delivers controlled radiofrequency energy through the microneedles and into the targeted tissue depth. This creates a thermal response designed to support collagen contraction and progressive tissue remodeling. Common applications include: Skin-tightening treatments Collagen-remodeling programs Facial-laxity improvement Jawline and lower-face contouring Neck rejuvenation Body skin-firming treatments Subdermal tissue-remodeling programs Subdermal Adipose Remodeling
Adjustable needle penetration allows practitioners to work at different tissue depths according to the treatment area and professional protocol. Deeper treatments may be incorporated into subdermal adipose remodeling programs for selected areas where clients are concerned about mild localized fullness, reduced definition, or loose-looking skin. Common applications include: Submental-area contouring Lower-face and jowl definition Abdominal contouring Thigh treatments Buttock skin-firming programs Body texture improvement Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial Rejuvenation Program
Designed to address common signs of aging and uneven facial texture with customized needle depth and RF intensity. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Enlarged pores Uneven skin texture Reduced skin firmness General collagen-remodeling treatments Recommended for: Clients seeking non-surgical facial rejuvenation Clients concerned about early signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement Skin-Tightening Program
Focuses on areas affected by reduced firmness, laxity, or weakened facial definition. Recommended applications: Lower-face laxity Jawline definition Neck tightening Jowl-area treatment Mildly loose-looking skin Recommended for: Clients seeking firmer-looking skin Clients concerned about facial contours Clients interested in non-surgical tightening programs Scar and Texture Program
Combines fractional microneedling and controlled RF energy to support progressive remodeling of uneven or scarred tissue. Recommended applications: Acne scars Uneven surface texture Enlarged pores Irregular skin appearance Selected body scars Recommended for: Clients with suitable acne scarring Clients seeking smoother-looking skin Clients requiring a structured multi-session program Body-Remodeling Program
Uses deeper adjustable settings and suitable cartridges for larger treatment areas. Recommended applications: Abdominal skin tightening Thigh texture improvement Buttock skin-firming treatments Bra-line and décolletage treatments Selected body-contouring programs Recommended for: Clients concerned about loose-looking body skin Clients seeking improved body texture Clients suitable for deeper RF microneedling protocols Four Interchangeable Cartridge Options
The system includes four cartridge configurations, allowing practitioners to select the appropriate coverage, penetration pattern, and treatment precision. Cartridge selection should be based on the treatment area, client condition, desired penetration depth, and professional protocol. Adjustable Needle Depth for Precise Treatment
Needle depth can be adjusted from 0.2mm to 7.0mm, enabling practitioners to tailor treatments for different facial and body areas. These ranges are general references only. Actual settings must be selected by a trained professional following client assessment and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face and Eye Area
Shallower settings and appropriate cartridges can be selected for delicate or detailed facial treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Fine-line reduction Under-eye skin rejuvenation Pore refinement Texture improvement Facial collagen stimulation Lower Face, Jawline, and Neck
Customized medium or deeper settings can support tightening and contour-enhancement programs. Common treatment objectives include: Lower-face tightening Jowl-area improvement Jawline definition Submental contouring Neck skin rejuvenation Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper settings and wider cartridges can be selected for larger body treatment areas. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal skin tightening Thigh texture improvement Buttock skin-firming treatments Body collagen remodeling Selected subdermal contouring programs Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, skin condition, treatment concerns, previous procedures, medications, and possible contraindications. Establish realistic treatment objectives and obtain informed consent. Step 2: Skin Preparation
Clean and disinfect the treatment area according to professional hygiene protocols. Apply topical numbing cream when appropriate and remove it completely before beginning treatment. Step 3: Cartridge and Setting Selection
Choose the correct cartridge, needle depth, RF frequency, energy level, and treatment pattern according to the client’s skin condition and selected treatment area. Step 4: Fractional RF Microneedling Treatment
Move the handpiece systematically across the selected area. The microneedles create fractional microchannels while delivering controlled RF energy at the chosen depth. Step 5: Post-Treatment Care
Complete the treatment according to protocol, inspect the treated area, and provide appropriate aftercare instructions. Recommend gentle skincare and suitable sun protection during recovery. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Morpheus 8 combines customizable treatment settings with professional facial and body applications. Key advantages include: Fractional microneedling and RF energy on one platform Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm needle depth Four interchangeable cartridge options 500W maximum output power Adjustable 1–15MHz RF frequency Dedicated 6MHz Thermagica mode 10.4-inch control screen Facial and body treatment capability Multiple treatment-area sizes Compact 13.3kg professional system CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Professional training and lifetime technical support Technical Specifications What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Morpheus 8 main machine 1 × RF microneedling treatment handpiece 1 × Thermagica treatment handpiece or applicable system attachment 12-pin cartridge configuration 24-pin cartridge configuration 40-pin cartridge configuration Nano cartridge configuration 1 × Universal or region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories The final cartridge quantities and package configuration should follow the selected order. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Needle-depth protocol guidance Facial treatment protocols Body treatment protocols Client consultation materials Aftercare guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Morpheus 8 system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the machine safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Control-screen operation Client consultation and screening Skin assessment Cartridge selection Needle-depth adjustment RF frequency and energy selection Facial treatment protocols Body treatment protocols Treatment hygiene and cartridge handling Post-treatment care Machine cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Morpheus 8 includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Consumable cartridges and components subject to normal wear are not included unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover consumable cartridges, normal wear, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications A detailed consultation, health-history assessment, and skin evaluation should be completed before treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals according to the supplied manual and local regulations. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active infection in the treatment area Open wounds or active skin lesions Uncontrolled medical or autoimmune conditions Recent isotretinoin use Active herpes simplex in the treatment area Significant keloid tendency Recent surgery or injectable treatment in the area Blood-clotting disorders Medications that affect healing or bleeding Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Individual risks and suitability should be assessed professionally. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever required. Pre-Treatment and Aftercare Guidance Before Treatment
Complete a professional skin consultation. Review medications and previous procedures. Avoid treating active infections or damaged skin. Remove makeup and disinfect the area. Apply topical numbing cream when appropriate. Obtain documented informed consent. After Treatment
Use gentle skincare during the initial recovery period. Avoid aggressive exfoliation and strong active ingredients. Avoid unnecessary heat and intense exercise as professionally advised. Protect the treated area from excessive sun exposure. Apply suitable broad-spectrum sunscreen. Do not scratch, pick, or irritate the treated skin. Follow all individualized practitioner instructions. Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, pinpoint marks, or mild crusting may occur. Recovery experience varies according to treatment depth, energy, area, and individual skin response. Intended Professional Users
The Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine is suitable for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Dermatology practices Skin-rejuvenation centers Cosmetic treatment clinics Professional beauty centers Body-contouring facilities Practitioners should review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing RF microneedling treatments. Why Choose the Morpheus 8?
Dual-Action RF Microneedling
The system combines fractional microneedling and radiofrequency energy, allowing practitioners to create controlled microchannels and deliver RF energy at selected tissue depths. Adjustable 0.2–7.0mm Depth
A wide needle-depth range supports superficial facial rejuvenation, deeper scar treatments, skin tightening, and selected body-remodeling programs. Four Cartridge Configurations
The 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano options provide different levels of precision and treatment coverage for facial and body applications. Face and Body Versatility
One professional platform can support treatments for the face, eye area, jawline, neck, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and décolletage. Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, treatment guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Morpheus 8?
The Morpheus 8 is a professional fractional RF microneedling system that combines controlled microneedling with radiofrequency energy for skin rejuvenation, tightening, texture improvement, and selected body treatments. How is RF microneedling different from conventional microneedling?
Conventional microneedling creates controlled microchannels. RF microneedling also delivers radiofrequency energy at a selected depth, providing an additional thermal response within the targeted tissue. What needle depths are available?
The machine provides an adjustable needle-depth range from 0.2mm to 7.0mm. The appropriate setting depends on the treatment area, skin condition, selected cartridge, and professional protocol. Which cartridges are included?
The available configurations are 12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano. Final quantities should be confirmed according to the selected package. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, under-eye region, lower face, jawline, neck, décolletage, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas. How long does one session take?
A typical session takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the size of the treatment area, selected protocol, and preparation time. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied treatment information indicates that one to four sessions may be used, commonly spaced approximately four to six weeks apart. The final course should be personalized following professional assessment. Is there recovery time?
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, or pinpoint marks may occur. The source information indicates approximately one to three days of visible downtime, although deeper treatments may require a longer recovery period. Can the system be used for acne scars?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive fractional RF microneedling treatments designed to support progressive collagen remodeling and improve the appearance of acne scars and uneven texture. Can it be used for body treatments?
Yes. Its adjustable depth and different cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, décolletage, and other suitable areas. Are results identical for every client?
No. Results and recovery vary according to age, skin condition, treatment depth, energy level, number of sessions, aftercare, and individual biological response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Machine operation, cartridge selection, needle-depth guidance, treatment protocols, safety procedures, cleaning, maintenance, and ongoing technical support are included. Add Professional RF Microneedling to Your Business
The Morpheus 8 enables aesthetic clinics, medical spas, and skin professionals to provide customizable facial rejuvenation, collagen-remodeling, skin-tightening, scar, and body-treatment programs. Five key benefits: Fractional microneedling and RF energy on one platform Adjustable needle depth from 0.2mm to 7.0mm Four cartridge options for precise facial and body treatments CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Cartridge
Treatment Purpose
Recommended Areas
12-Pin Cartridge
Precise, concentrated treatment
Small facial areas, scars, and detailed treatments
24-Pin Cartridge
Balanced facial coverage
Face, jawline, neck, and general rejuvenation
40-Pin Cartridge
Wider treatment coverage
Larger facial zones and body areas
Nano Cartridge
Superficial, non-needle skin treatment
Delicate areas and surface-level skin programs
Depth Range
General Treatment Level
Possible Applications
0.2–0.5mm
Superficial
Surface texture and delicate areas
0.5–1.5mm
Light facial treatment
Fine lines, pores, and general rejuvenation
1.5–3.0mm
Medium-depth treatment
Texture, scars, tightening, and collagen remodeling
3.0–4.0mm
Deep facial or body treatment
Lower-face, neck, and selected body applications
4.0–7.0mm
Deeper body treatment
Subdermal and larger body-area protocols
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Suitable Program
Under-Eye Area
Delicate texture and fine-line improvement
Facial rejuvenation
Face
Collagen stimulation, pore refinement, and wrinkle treatment
Facial rejuvenation
Acne Scars
Progressive scar and texture remodeling
Scar and texture
Lower Face and Jowls
Tightening and contour improvement
Skin tightening
Jawline
Definition and submental-area treatment
Skin tightening
Neck and Décolletage
Firming and texture improvement
Facial or body remodeling
Abdomen
Skin tightening and subdermal remodeling
Body remodeling
Thighs
Texture improvement and firming
Body remodeling
Buttocks
Skin-quality and firmness improvement
Body remodeling
Specification
Details
Product Name
Morpheus 8 RF Microneedling Machine
Technology
Fractional radiofrequency microneedling
Maximum Output Power
500W
RF Frequency—Microneedling
1–15MHz adjustable
RF Frequency—Thermagica
6MHz
Needle Cartridges
12-pin, 24-pin, 40-pin, and Nano
Adjustable Needle Depth
0.2–7.0mm
Treatment-Area Sizes
1.1 × 1.1cm, 1.6 × 1.6cm, 1.6 × 1.5cm, and 2 × 2cm
Display
10.4-inch control screen
Input Voltage
100V, 110V, or 220V
Machine Dimensions
40 × 36 × 81cm
Machine Weight
13.3kg
Package Dimensions
49 × 46 × 102cm
Package Weight
28.4kg
Treatment Areas
Face, eyes, jawline, neck, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and décolletage
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$2,999.00
Professional Pelvic Floor Strengthening System
Non-Invasive HIFEM Technology for Pelvic Wellness and Bladder-Control Programs
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system developed for pelvic floor strengthening, postpartum wellness, bladder-control support, and intimate wellness programs.
High-intensity focused electromagnetic energy stimulates deep pelvic floor muscles and produces approximately 12,000 muscle contractions during a 28–30-minute session. Clients remain comfortably seated and fully clothed throughout the treatment.
With adjustable power, customizable frequency settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and pre-programmed protocols, the system enables professionals to personalize every session according to the client’s comfort level and treatment objectives.
12,000 contractions per session | 28–30-minute treatment | Fully clothed | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Advanced HIFEM Technology on One Professional Platform High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
The system generates focused electromagnetic energy that penetrates the pelvic floor area and stimulates powerful involuntary muscle contractions. These contractions engage muscles more intensively and consistently than conventional voluntary exercises. Common applications include: Pelvic floor muscle strengthening Bladder-control support Postpartum wellness programs Intimate wellness treatments Core stability support Age-related pelvic muscle conditioning Supramaximal Muscle Contractions
Each session produces approximately 12,000 supramaximal contractions. The client does not need to perform manual exercises, allowing the system to provide consistent muscle activation throughout the treatment. Common benefits include: Consistent pelvic muscle engagement Improved muscle strength and endurance Convenient treatment without manual exercise Personalized intensity according to client comfort Structured treatment programs with repeatable settings Fully Clothed, Non-Invasive Treatment
Clients remain seated and fully clothed during the entire session. No applicators are inserted into the body, and the procedure requires no injections, incisions, anesthesia, or complicated preparation. This discreet treatment experience is suitable for professional environments where client privacy, comfort, and convenience are essential. Select the Right Program for Each Client Postpartum Wellness Program
Designed to support pelvic floor conditioning following pregnancy and childbirth, subject to professional assessment and appropriate medical clearance. Recommended applications: Postpartum pelvic muscle weakness Reduced pelvic floor tone Bladder leakage concerns Core stability support Recommended for: Postpartum clients Women seeking non-invasive pelvic wellness support Clients who find manual pelvic floor exercises difficult Bladder-Control Support Program
Provides targeted pelvic floor muscle stimulation for clients experiencing weakness associated with bladder-control concerns. Recommended applications: Stress-related urinary leakage Leakage during coughing or sneezing Leakage during physical activity Reduced bladder-support muscle strength Recommended for: Women and men with pelvic floor weakness Mature clients Clients seeking a non-surgical support program Intimate Wellness Program
Focuses on improving pelvic muscle tone, awareness, endurance, and control as part of a professional intimate wellness service. Recommended applications: Reduced pelvic muscle tone Pelvic floor conditioning Intimate wellness support Confidence and body-awareness programs Recommended for: Women’s wellness centers Intimate wellness clinics Clients seeking discreet, non-invasive treatment Pelvic Strength and Maintenance Program
Created for clients who want ongoing pelvic floor conditioning after completing an initial treatment course. Recommended applications: Pelvic muscle maintenance Core foundation support Age-related muscle conditioning Long-term wellness programs Recommended for: Existing pelvic floor clients Mature women and men Clients completing a structured treatment course Customizable Power and Frequency Settings The system allows professionals to adjust treatment intensity according to the client’s needs, tolerance, and program objectives. Treatment settings and session frequency should always be selected following professional consultation and client screening. Professional Pelvic Wellness Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, pelvic wellness concerns, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Determine whether professional or medical clearance is required. Step 2: Comfortable Positioning
The client sits comfortably in the treatment chair while remaining fully clothed. Correct seating alignment helps position the pelvic floor area over the electromagnetic treatment zone. Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate program, power level, frequency, and treatment duration. Begin at a comfortable intensity and adjust progressively according to the client’s response. Step 4: HIFEM Treatment
The system generates repeated electromagnetic pulses for approximately 28–30 minutes. The client experiences strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions while remaining comfortably seated. Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program automatically. The client can leave the treatment area immediately unless the practitioner provides individual aftercare recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair combines professional performance with a discreet, comfortable client experience. Key advantages include: Approximately 12,000 contractions per session Fully clothed and non-invasive treatment Adjustable 300W–5000W power output Customizable 3–200Hz frequency range Intelligent digital touchscreen Pre-programmed treatment protocols Automatic shut-off and intensity controls Multiple professional color options Universal 110V–240V power compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing technical support Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair 1 × Integrated intelligent touchscreen control system Pre-programmed treatment protocols Adjustable power and frequency controls 1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable Selected professional chair color Documentation and Training
English user manual Operating and safety guid Standard treatment protocol templates Postpartum wellness protocol guidance Bladder-control support protocol guidance Intimate wellness protocol guidance Client consultation and education materials Service-menu and treatment-package guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes professional operating guidance to help your team use the system confidently and responsibly. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and program operation Client consultation and screening Correct client positioning Power and frequency adjustment Treatment protocol selection Safety procedures and contraindications Machine cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Service planning and client communication Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and share photographs or video when required. A technician will assess the machine remotely. Operating guidance or replacement parts will be arranged when applicable. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before treatment. This system must be operated according to the supplied manual and applicable local requirements. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Active infection or inflammation Recent surgery in the treatment area Unexplained pelvic pain or bleeding Epilepsy or conditions affected by electromagnetic stimulation Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning a pelvic floor treatment program. Intended Professional Users
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Women’s wellness centers Gynecology and pelvic wellness practices Medical spas Physiotherapy and rehabilitation centers Postpartum wellness centers Intimate wellness clinics Professional beauty and wellness facilities Local licensing and operating requirements should be reviewed before offering treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
Approximately 12,000 Contractions per Session
Advanced HIFEM technology provides intensive pelvic floor muscle stimulation during a convenient 28–30-minute session. Discreet Client Experience
Clients remain fully clothed and comfortably seated, creating a private and convenient treatment experience without invasive applicators. Personalized Professional Programs
Adjustable power, frequency, and protocol settings allow practitioners to tailor sessions according to client comfort and treatment objectives. Multiple Wellness Applications
One system supports postpartum wellness, bladder-control programs, intimate wellness, core conditioning, and pelvic floor maintenance services. Complete Professional Support
The package includes training, operating documentation, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair?
The EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair is a professional HIFEM system that uses focused electromagnetic energy to stimulate repeated pelvic floor muscle contractions while the client remains comfortably seated. How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 28–30 minutes, depending on the selected protocol and the client’s individual treatment plan. Does the client remain fully clothed?
Yes. Clients can remain fully clothed throughout the session. Lightweight clothing that does not contain metal is generally the most appropriate. How many contractions occur during one session?
The system is designed to generate approximately 12,000 pelvic floor muscle contractions during a complete session. Is the treatment invasive?
No. The treatment does not require surgery, injections, internal applicators, or anesthesia. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients typically experience strong, rhythmic pelvic muscle contractions. Intensity can be adjusted progressively to maintain an appropriate comfort level. How many sessions are recommended?
The source protocol recommends two sessions per week over an 8–12-week program. The final schedule should be personalized following professional consultation. When may clients notice changes?
Individual experiences vary. Some clients may notice increased pelvic muscle awareness during the early stages of a program, while strength and functional changes generally require a consistent series of sessions. Can the chair be used for postpartum clients?
It can be incorporated into postpartum wellness programs after an appropriate professional assessment and medical clearance when necessary. Is the system suitable for men?
The technology may also support pelvic floor conditioning programs for suitable male clients, subject to professional screening and an appropriate treatment plan. Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The power output and frequency can be adjusted according to the selected protocol, treatment objective, and client comfort. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Operating guidance, safety training, treatment protocol instruction, and ongoing technical support are included. Add Professional Pelvic Wellness to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair enables clinics and wellness centers to introduce a discreet, non-invasive pelvic floor service supported by advanced HIFEM technology. Five key benefits: Approximately 12,000 contractions in a 28–30-minute session Fully clothed and non-invasive client experience Adjustable power, frequency, and treatment protocols Multiple pelvic wellness applications on one platform CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Power Output
300W–5000W
Adjustable treatment intensity
Frequency Range
3–200Hz
Customizable muscle-stimulation patterns
Session Duration
28–30 minutes
Efficient professional treatment
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Structured pelvic wellness programs
Treatment Position
Seated and fully clothed
Discreet, convenient client experience
Control System
Intelligent touchscreen
Protocol and intensity management
Treatment Category
Primary Objective
Suitable Clients
Postpartum Wellness
Support pelvic floor muscle recovery and conditioning
Postpartum clients with appropriate clearance
Bladder-Control Support
Strengthen muscles associated with bladder support
Women and men with pelvic floor weakness
Intimate Wellness
Improve pelvic muscle tone, control, and awareness
Adult wellness clients
Menopause Support
Support pelvic muscle conditioning during age-related changes
Menopausal and postmenopausal clients
Core Stability
Strengthen the pelvic foundation supporting the core
Clients seeking posture and stability support
Maintenance Programs
Help maintain pelvic muscle strength after a treatment course
Returning wellness clients
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSLIM Pelvic Floor Chair
Technology
HIFEM High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
Primary Application
Pelvic floor strengthening and intimate wellness
Power Output
300W–5000W adjustable
Frequency Range
3–200Hz
Session Duration
Approximately 28–30 minutes
Contractions per Session
Approximately 12,000
Treatment Position
Seated and fully clothed
Control System
Intelligent digital touchscreen
Treatment Programs
Pre-programmed and customizable protocols
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature control, and intensity limits
Available Colors
Orange, pink, blue, and white
Power Supply
110V–240V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$3,999.00
Professional Four-Handle NEO EMShape Body-Sculpting System Straight and Curved Electromagnetic Applicators for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, fat-reduction support, and improved definition across multiple body areas. The system combines EMShape electromagnetic technology with four ergonomic applicators: two straight handles for conventional placement and two curved handles designed for improved contact across contoured anatomical areas. With approximately 20,000 contractions per session, adjustable treatment settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, air-and-water cooling, and a professional vertical design, the machine is suitable for body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, fitness facilities, and wellness studios. EMShape technology | Two straight and two curved handles | Vertical design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform EMShape Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
EMShape technology delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Waistline definition Calf muscle stimulation Straight and Curved Applicator Treatment
The system includes two straight and two curved handles for different body shapes and placement requirements. Common benefits include: Conventional straight-handle placement Improved contact on curved body areas Focused muscle stimulation Bilateral treatment capability Multi-area treatment flexibility Customized applicator positioning Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Abdomen and thigh treatments Arms and abdomen Buttocks and thighs Waistline and love-handle areas Bilateral calf treatments Customized multi-area programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal and Waistline Program
Uses suitable straight or curved applicators to stimulate abdominal muscles and support midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Waistline sculpting Love-handle-area programs General midsection definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for lower-body treatment. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs Arm and Calf Program
Uses the available applicators for suitable upper-arm and calf muscle-conditioning programs. Recommended applications: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Biceps and triceps conditioning Calf muscle stimulation Bilateral limb treatments Improved-looking muscle definition Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm or calf tone Fitness and body-contouring clients Clients requiring smaller-area placement Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial NEO EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Multi-area conditioning Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Recommended for: Returning NEO EMSlim clients Clients completing six to eight initial sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to applicator type, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waistline
Straight or curved handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Love-handle-area treatment Multi-zone midsection sculpting Buttocks and Thighs
Curved and straight applicators support customized placement across suitable lower-body areas. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatment Improved-looking definition Lower-body sculpting Arms and Calves
The applicator selection supports suitable upper-arm and lower-leg treatment programs. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Arm definition Calf muscle conditioning Bilateral limb treatment Customized smaller-area programs Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Selection and Placement
Select straight or curved handles according to the treatment area and client anatomy. Position and secure the applicators over suitable muscle groups. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response. Step 4: EMShape Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine combines EMShape technology with straight and curved applicator options. Key advantages include: Professional EMShape technology Four ergonomic treatment handles Two straight applicators Two curved applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations Treatments for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, and calves Vertical professional design Adjustable energy intensity 12-inch intelligent touchscreen Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Six- to eight-session treatment programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim main unit 2 × Straight EMShape treatment applicators 2 × Curved EMShape treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories 12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls Air-and-water circulation cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Straight-handle placement guidance Curved-handle placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Straight-handle placement Curved-handle placement Applicator selection by body area Energy-level adjustment Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Calf-treatment protocols Multi-area treatment planning Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Remove metal objects from each treatment area. Select the correct straight or curved applicator. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with conservative energy levels. Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort. Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record applicator type, treatment area, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Premium body-sculpting clinics Medical spas Slimming centers Aesthetic salons Fitness facilities Gyms Wellness centers Professional body-contouring studios Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMShape or HI-EMT treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine? Straight and Curved Applicators
Two straight and two curved handles support customized placement across different body shapes and treatment areas. Professional EMShape Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session. Multiple Treatment Areas
One machine supports customized programs for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, straight- and curved-handle guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional electromagnetic body-sculpting system with two straight and two curved applicators. What is EMShape technology?
EMShape is the supplied electromagnetic muscle-stimulation technology used by this system to produce repeated involuntary muscle contractions. What is different about the curved handles?
The curved applicators are designed to improve placement and contact across suitable contoured body areas. Correct selection depends on the client’s anatomy and treatment area. Do curved handles guarantee deeper muscle engagement?
No. Treatment depth and response depend on the electromagnetic output, applicator position, client anatomy, settings, and individual response. How many applicators are included?
The package includes four handles: two straight applicators and two curved applicators. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves. Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
The four-handle system supports suitable multi-area operation according to the selected protocol and machine configuration. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur. Can EMShape replace regular exercise?
EMShape treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course. What performance figures are supplied?
The muscle-definition improvement of up to 30% and fat reduction of up to 20%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes. How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, applicator selection, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, straight- and curved-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Curved-Handle EMShape Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, and wellness professionals to provide customized electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments using straight and curved applicators. Five key benefits: Professional EMShape electromagnetic technology Two straight and two curved ergonomic applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
EMShape electromagnetic stimulation
Muscle-conditioning treatments
Treatment Handles
Four
Multi-area treatment capability
Straight Handles
Two
Conventional and precise placement
Curved Handles
Two
Contoured and ergonomic placement
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Six to eight sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Personalized client comfort
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Applicator Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Straight or curved handles
Waistline
Contouring and core-area stimulation
Curved-handle placement
Love Handles
Side-body conditioning
Curved-handle placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Bilateral curved or straight handles
Inner and Outer Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Suitable bilateral placement
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Straight handles
Calves
Lower-leg muscle conditioning
Suitable straight or curved handles
Multiple Areas
Comprehensive body-sculpting program
Up to four handles
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine
Technology
HI-EMT with EMShape technology
Design
Vertical tower
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Straight Handles
Two
Curved Handles
Two
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Primary Functions
Muscle conditioning and body contouring
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 30% increased muscle definition and 20% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves
Treatment Configuration
Focused, bilateral, or multi-area
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,299.00
Professional 14 Tesla HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System High-Power Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine is a professional non-invasive body-sculpting system developed for muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas. High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology delivers a maximum magnetic intensity of 14 Tesla, producing approximately 20,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute treatment session. Available with two or four ergonomic applicators, the machine supports focused, bilateral, multi-area, and optional dual-client treatments. Its 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy controls, and combined air-and-water cooling system support continuous professional operation. 14 Tesla HI-EMT | Two- or four-handle options | Multi-area treatment | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty Three Professional Functions on One Platform 14 Tesla HI-EMT Muscle Stimulation
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock muscle stimulation Thigh muscle conditioning Upper-arm toning Waistline definition Professional fitness treatments Multi-Area Body Contouring
The available two- or four-handle configuration supports different applicator-placement strategies according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Abdomen and waist treatments Buttock and thigh programs Upper-arm conditioning Bilateral muscle stimulation Single-area focused treatment Customized multi-area programs Optional Dual-Client Operation
The four-handle configuration can divide applicators between two appropriately screened clients. Common benefits include: Simultaneous two-client treatments Flexible applicator allocation Independent treatment planning Improved clinic scheduling High-volume professional operation Customized client programs Each client requires an individual consultation, screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring. Select the Right Program for Each Client Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Core-area stimulation Midsection definition Waistline sculpting General abdominal programs Recommended for: Clients seeking improved abdominal tone Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation Clients following healthy lifestyle programs Buttock-Toning Program
Positions the applicators over suitable buttock muscle areas to support bilateral conditioning and shape-enhancement programs. Recommended applications: Buttock muscle stimulation Toning and firmness support Bilateral buttock treatments Shape-enhancement programs Lower-body conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved buttock tone Clients combining treatment with exercise Clients receiving lower-body programs Thigh and Arm Program
Uses the available applicators sequentially or bilaterally across suitable thigh or upper-arm muscle groups. Recommended applications: Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Upper-arm muscle stimulation Bilateral limb treatments Arm and thigh definition Multi-area muscle conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved arm or thigh tone Fitness and body-contouring clients Clients requiring several treatment areas Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Fitness-program support Seasonal body-sculpting treatments Continued core conditioning Recommended for: Returning EMSlim clients Clients completing four to six initial sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Power and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatment according to the model configuration, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol. Energy should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waistline
One or more applicators can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle activation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Improved abdominal tone Multi-zone midsection treatment Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support focused or bilateral lower-body treatments across suitable muscle groups. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning Bilateral lower-body treatments Improved-looking definition Lower-body sculpting Upper Arms
Suitable applicator placement supports focused or bilateral upper-arm conditioning. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm muscle stimulation Biceps conditioning Triceps conditioning Bilateral arm treatments Improved-looking arm definition Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with a conservative energy level. Increase the intensity gradually according to the client’s comfort and muscle response. Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine combines high-power electromagnetic technology with flexible handle configurations and professional controls. Key advantages include: Professional 14 Tesla HI-EMT technology Choice of two or four ergonomic applicators Approximately 20,000 contractions per session Focused, bilateral, and multi-area treatments Optional dual-client operation Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline Adjustable energy intensity 12-inch intelligent touchscreen Air-and-water circulation cooling Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Four- to six-session treatment programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim main unit 2 or 4 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Applicator-positioning accessories 12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls Air-and-water circulation cooling system 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card The selected two- or four-handle configuration should be confirmed when placing the order. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Applicator-placement guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Abdominal treatment protocols Waistline treatment protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Multi-area and dual-client guidance Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area assessment Correct applicator placement Two- and four-handle configurations Multi-area treatment planning Optional dual-client operation Energy-level adjustment Abdominal and waistline protocols Arm-treatment protocols Buttock-treatment protocols Thigh-treatment protocols Client monitoring Post-treatment guidance Cooling-system maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Cardiac rhythm disorders Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active muscle injury Severe inflammation Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery within the treatment area Serious neurological or muscular conditions Reduced or impaired sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment. Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use. Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation. Complete a separate consultation for every client. Remove metal objects from each treatment area. Confirm correct applicator placement before activation. Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions. Begin with a conservative energy level. Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort. Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment. Continuously monitor both clients during dual-client operation. Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Slimming clinics Body-contouring centers Medical spas Aesthetic clinics Fitness centers Gyms Physiotherapy facilities Wellness centers Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT or dual-client treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine? 14 Tesla Magnetic Intensity
The machine provides a listed maximum magnetic output of 14 Tesla for professional electromagnetic muscle-stimulation programs. Flexible Applicator Options
Two- and four-handle configurations support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and optional dual-client treatments. Multiple Body Areas
One system supports customized programs for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline. Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch intelligent touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support continuous professional operation. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional HI-EMT system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, body conditioning, and body-contouring programs. What does 14 Tesla mean?
Tesla is a unit used to describe magnetic-field strength. The machine’s supplied maximum magnetic intensity is 14 Tesla. Does a higher Tesla rating guarantee better results?
No. Treatment outcomes also depend on applicator design, positioning, pulse parameters, selected settings, treatment consistency, and individual response. How many applicators are included?
The machine is available with two or four ergonomic applicators, depending on the selected model. Which handle configuration should I choose?
A two-handle configuration is suitable for focused or bilateral treatments. A four-handle configuration supports greater multi-area flexibility and optional dual-client operation. Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
Yes, with the suitable four-handle configuration. Each client requires separate screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring. Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, upper arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes. How many sessions are recommended?
We recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments. What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy should be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response. Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur. Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course. What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes. How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies. Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, applicator placement, settings, diet, exercise, and individual response. What cooling system does the machine use?
The system uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation. What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, energy adjustment, two- and four-handle configurations, dual-client protocols, cooling-system maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting. Add 14 Tesla HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine enables slimming clinics, fitness centers, medical spas, and body-contouring professionals to provide focused or multi-area electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments. Five key benefits: Professional HI-EMT technology with a listed 14 Tesla maximum output Flexible two- or four-handle configurations Approximately 20,000 contractions per session A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for model selection, product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Technology
HI-EMT
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation
Maximum Magnetic Intensity
14 Tesla
Professional high-power output
Treatment Handles
Two or four, model-dependent
Focused, bilateral, or multi-area treatment
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Intensive muscle activation
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Efficient treatment scheduling
Treatment Course
Four to six sessions
Structured body-sculpting program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive muscle conditioning
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports continuous operation
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Configuration
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
One or two handles
Waistline
Contouring and core-area stimulation
Targeted or combined placement
Buttocks
Toning and shape-enhancement support
Bilateral handle placement
Inner Thighs
Lower-body conditioning
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Outer Thighs
Thigh definition and muscle stimulation
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Upper Arms
Arm muscle stimulation and definition
Sequential or bilateral treatment
Multiple Areas
Comprehensive body-sculpting program
Four-handle model
Dual Clients
Simultaneous independent programs
Four-handle configuration
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology
Maximum Magnetic Intensity
14 Tesla
Treatment Handles
Two or four ergonomic applicators, model-dependent
Contractions per Session
Approximately 20,000
Primary Functions
Muscle conditioning, body contouring, and fat-reduction support
Supplied Performance Figures
Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
Treatment Configuration
Focused, bilateral, multi-area, or optional dual-client
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Four to six sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Energy Intensity
Adjustable
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,699.00
Professional 7D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System
Eight-Cartridge Focused Ultrasound Technology for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is a professional aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments.
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas.
With adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, facial and body treatment capability, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, slimming centers, and professional skincare facilities.
7D HIFU technology | Eight cartridges | 1.5–16mm treatment depths | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Common applications include: Facial skin tightening Fine-line and wrinkle care Jawline contouring Neck and décolletage treatments Body skin-firming programs Professional body-contouring treatments Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are designed for treatments across different facial tissue depths. Common applications include: Reduced facial firmness Fine lines and wrinkles Lower-face laxity Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatment Neck skin tightening Body Contouring and Skin Firming
The 6mm, 8mm, 10mm, 13mm, and 16mm cartridges support professional treatments for suitable body areas. Common applications include: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Cellulite-appearance improvement Select the Right Program for Each Client Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments. Recommended applications: Fine lines and wrinkles Reduced facial firmness Uneven-looking skin texture Early signs of aging General collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation Clients concerned about visible signs of aging Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition. Recommended applications: Lower-face laxity Reduced jawline definition Jowl-area treatments Double-chin concerns Neck skin tightening Recommended for: Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face Clients concerned about facial contours Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments. Recommended applications: Abdomen contouring Upper-arm treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin tightening Recommended for: Clients concerned about localized body areas Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program. Recommended applications: Facial-lifting maintenance Skin-firming maintenance Body-contour maintenance Continued collagen-stimulation programs Recommended for: Returning HIFU clients Clients completing an initial treatment plan Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine provides eight cartridge depths for different facial and body applications. Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Face, Chin, and Jawline
The three facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable facial areas. Common treatment objectives include: Facial lifting Fine-line care Wrinkle reduction Jawline definition Double-chin-area treatment Neck and Décolletage
Suitable facial depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs. Common treatment objectives include: Neck skin tightening Reduced appearance of neck lines Improved-looking firmness Décolletage rejuvenation Collagen-stimulation support Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
The deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments. Common treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Abdomen treatments Thigh contouring Buttock-area programs Body skin firming Professional Treatment Applications
How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations. Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol. Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance. Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance. Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with straightforward professional operation. Key advantages include: Professional 7D HIFU technology Eight treatment cartridges Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm Three facial cartridges Five body cartridges Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable energy settings Intelligent touchscreen controls Approximately 30–60-minute sessions Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs Jawline and neck treatments Body-contouring and skin-firming programs 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications Results timelines and duration are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty 7D HIFU main unit 1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece 1 × 1.5mm cartridge 1 × 3.0mm cartridge 1 × 4.5mm cartridge 1 × 6.0mm cartridge 1 × 8.0mm cartridge 1 × 10.0mm cartridge 1 × 13.0mm cartridge 1 × 16.0mm cartridge Intelligent touchscreen control system Adjustable energy controls 1 × Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Cartridge-selection guidance Energy-adjustment guidance Facial treatment protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Client-consultation materials Post-treatment guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Facial and body assessment Treatment-area mapping Cartridge selection Energy-level adjustment Handpiece positioning Facial-lifting protocols Jawline and neck protocols Body-contouring protocols Post-treatment care Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds or severe inflammation Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Keloid tendency or significant scarring Severe vascular conditions Poor wound healing Severe or recent sunburn Recent surgery within the treatment area Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments Reduced or impaired skin sensation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use. Confirm the cartridge and treatment depth before beginning. Map the treatment area carefully. Apply sufficient ultrasound gel. Begin with conservative energy settings. Monitor client comfort and tissue response. Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas. Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol. Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Aesthetic clinics Beauty salons Medical spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring clinics Professional spas Slimming centers Wellness facilities Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine? Eight Multi-Depth Cartridges
Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized facial and body treatments. Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the target area and client. Intelligent Touchscreen Operation
The touchscreen interface supports cartridge selection, parameter adjustment, and professional treatment management. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments. What does 7D HIFU mean?
The product uses a multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at different facial and body treatment depths. How many cartridges are included?
The package includes eight cartridges covering treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm. Which cartridges are used for facial treatments?
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are supplied for professional facial and neck treatment protocols. Which cartridges are used for body treatments?
The 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm cartridges are supplied for suitable body treatment areas. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks. How long does one treatment take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and selected protocol. How many treatments are recommended?
One to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition and objectives. When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect after one session, with progressive changes continuing over two to three months. How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response. Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur. What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as focused ultrasound energy is delivered. Can the machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the upper arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas. Are results guaranteed?
Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Professional 7D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine enables aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, and wellness professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services. Five key benefits: Eight professional cartridges from 1.5mm to 16mm Facial and body treatment capability Adjustable energy settings for customized protocols Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cartridge details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Treatment Depth
General Treatment Level
Possible Applications
1.5mm
Superficial facial tissue
Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas
3.0mm
Dermal facial layer
Collagen stimulation and skin tightening
4.5mm
Deeper facial layer
Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments
6.0mm
Shallow body treatment
Arms and smaller body areas
8.0mm
Medium body treatment
Abdomen, waist, and thigh programs
10.0mm
Deeper body treatment
Body contouring and suitable buttock areas
13.0mm
Deep body treatment
Larger body areas and thicker tissue
16.0mm
Maximum listed body depth
Professional deep body-contouring protocols
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Recommended Depth Category
Face
Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care
1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm
Chin and Jawline
Contour definition and lower-face tightening
Suitable facial depth
Neck
Skin tightening and line care
Suitable facial depth
Décolletage
Texture and firmness improvement
Professionally selected facial depth
Upper Arms
Skin firming and contouring
Suitable body depth
Abdomen
Body contouring and tightening
Suitable deeper body depth
Thighs
Contouring and cellulite-appearance care
Suitable body depth
Buttocks
Skin-firming and contouring support
Suitable body depth
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine
Technology
7D High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Treatment Cartridges
Eight
Treatment Depths
1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Facial Cartridges
1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm
Body Cartridges
6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm
Primary Functions
Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Treatment Frequency
Personalized according to client assessment
Supplied Results Timeline
Initial changes may be visible after one session, with progressive improvement over two to three months
Supplied Results Duration
Approximately 12–18 months
Energy Output
Adjustable
Display
Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection
Power Supply
110V or 220V
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$1,999.00
Professional 360-Degree Cryolipolysis System
Multiple Applicators for Non-Invasive Body Contouring Treatments
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional controlled-cooling system developed for medical spas, body-contouring studios, aesthetic clinics and professional beauty centers.
Its 360-degree applicator design provides consistent cooling coverage across the selected treatment area. Multiple applicator sizes allow trained operators to create customized protocols for the abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms.
The system is designed for non-invasive treatment of suitable localized fat deposits without surgery, needles or anesthesia.
360-degree cooling | Multiple applicator sizes | Adjustable temperature | Three-year warranty
Four Body-Contouring Applications on One Professional Platform Abdomen Treatments
Cryolipolysis applicators can be positioned over suitable localized fat deposits on the abdomen. An appropriately sized applicator should be selected according to the dimensions, thickness and shape of the treatment area. Common applications include: Upper-abdomen contouring Lower-abdomen contouring Localized abdominal fat Central body-contouring programs Multi-session abdominal protocols Customized abdomen treatments Waist and Flank Treatments
The system supports professional contouring treatments for suitable localized fat deposits around the waist and flanks. Common applications include: Waist-contour refinement Love-handle treatments Side-body contouring Lower-back treatments Flank-reduction programs Customized waist protocols Thigh Treatments
Multiple applicator sizes support professional treatments for suitable areas of the inner and outer thighs. Common applications include: Inner-thigh contouring Outer-thigh contouring Upper-thigh treatments Localized thigh areas Lower-body contouring Multi-area thigh protocols Upper-Arm and Back Treatments
Smaller applicators may be selected for suitable localized fat deposits on the upper arms, back and bra-line areas. Common applications include: Upper-arm contouring Upper-back treatments Lower-back treatments Bra-line areas Small localized fat deposits Customized body-contouring programs The appropriate applicator should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, client suitability and professional protocol. Select the Right Applicator for Each Treatment Area The system supports multiple applicator sizes. The appropriate applicator should be selected according to the size, shape and thickness of the intended treatment area. Application 1: Abdomen
A body-contouring application for suitable localized abdominal fat deposits. Recommended applications: Upper abdomen Lower abdomen Central abdominal areas Broader treatment zones Recommended for: Abdominal-contouring programs Multi-session body treatments Clients with suitable localized fat Clinics offering focused abdomen services Application 2: Waist and Flanks
A targeted application for localized fat deposits around the sides of the body. Recommended applications: Waist Love handles Flanks Lower back Recommended for: Waist-contouring treatments Side-body refinement Multi-area body packages Clinics offering torso-contouring services Application 3: Thighs
A lower-body application for suitable inner- and outer-thigh areas. Recommended applications: Inner thighs Outer thighs Upper thighs Localized lower-body areas Recommended for: Thigh-contouring programs Lower-body packages Multi-area treatments Body-contouring clinics Application 4: Upper Arms and Back
A targeted application for smaller localized fat deposits. Recommended applications: Upper arms Upper back Lower back Bra-line areas Recommended for: Smaller treatment zones Targeted contouring services Customized treatment packages Clinics expanding their body-treatment menu Precision Cooling for Customized Cryolipolysis Treatments
The 360 Cryolipolysis Machine provides an adjustable cooling range from 5°C to −11°C. Each setting should be selected according to the applicator, treatment area, tissue condition and professional protocol. The adjustable cooling system gives trained operators greater control over treatment temperature and client comfort. The correct temperature, suction level and treatment duration must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area. Adjustable Treatment Areas
Different applicators support different body areas and professional contouring protocols. Torso Treatments
Upper abdomen Lower abdomen Waist Flanks Upper back Lower back Lower-Body Treatments
Inner thighs Outer thighs Upper thighs Other suitable localized areas Multi-area lower-body programs Smaller Treatment Areas
Upper arms Bra-line areas Small back areas Other appropriately selected localized fat deposits Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected applicator, cooling temperature, suction setting and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s medical history, treatment goals, tissue condition and suitability. The intended areas are measured and an appropriate treatment plan is created. 2. Skin and Applicator Preparation
The selected area is exposed and prepared according to the operating protocol. A protective antifreeze membrane is placed correctly over the skin before applicator attachment. 3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the applicator, cooling temperature, suction level, session duration and other available settings according to the treatment area and professional protocol. 4. Controlled Cooling Treatment
The applicator is positioned securely over the localized fat deposit. The system applies controlled cooling for approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the selected area and protocol. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
The applicator and protective membrane are removed. The operator inspects the treated area and performs the recommended post-treatment procedure. Temporary redness, firmness, bruising, tenderness, tingling, numbness or sensitivity may occur following treatment. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital controls with adjustable 360-degree cooling technology for streamlined use in professional body-contouring settings. Key operating advantages include: Digital control display Adjustable 5°C to −11°C cooling range 360-degree applicator coverage Multiple applicator sizes Adjustable treatment parameters Automatic temperature control Protective skin membranes 110V–240V power compatibility Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main cryolipolysis system, treatment applicators and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 360 Cryolipolysis control system Multiple treatment applicators Applicator connection components Protective antifreeze membranes Required treatment accessories Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Applicator installation instructions Treatment-area assessment guidance Cooling and suction parameter guidance Protective-membrane instructions Safety and contraindication information Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Applicator installation Digital-control operation Applicator-size selection Cooling-temperature adjustment Suction-level selection Treatment-area assessment Protective-membrane application Basic body-contouring protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital display and control system Internal cooling components Original treatment applicators Applicator connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect applicator operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of membranes and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cryolipolysis equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation, tissue assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Cryoglobulinemia Cold agglutinin disease Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria Severe cold sensitivity Raynaud’s disease Uncontrolled cardiovascular conditions Severe circulation disorders Open wounds or active infections Severe skin conditions in the treatment area Impaired sensation Bleeding disorders Recent surgery Hernia in or near the treatment area Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The protective antifreeze membrane must be positioned correctly before cooling begins. The skin and applicator contact must be monitored throughout the session. Possible treatment responses include temporary redness, bruising, swelling, firmness, tenderness, cramping, tingling, numbness and changes in skin sensitivity. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Medical spas Aesthetic clinics Body-contouring studios Professional beauty centers Wellness clinics Trained body-contouring practitioners Qualified healthcare professionals Businesses expanding their non-invasive body services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine? Treat Multiple Body Areas
Multiple applicator sizes support professional treatments for the abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms. Provide Consistent Cooling Coverage
The 360-degree applicator design distributes cooling across the selected treatment area for consistent professional application. Customize Every Treatment
Adjustable cooling, suction, duration and applicator selection allow treatments to be adapted to tissue condition and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The system allows clinics to add non-invasive body-contouring treatments, multi-area packages and customized treatment programs. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is cryolipolysis?
Cryolipolysis is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that applies controlled cooling to suitable localized fat tissue. The body gradually processes affected cells following treatment. What does 360-degree cooling mean?
The applicator distributes cooling around the treatment surface, providing consistent coverage across the selected localized area. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas may include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper and lower back, inner and outer thighs and upper arms. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes per treatment area. The exact duration depends on the applicator, treatment zone and professional protocol. How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 1–3 sessions per area, commonly spaced several weeks apart. The final protocol depends on tissue condition, treatment goals and individual response. When may clients notice changes?
Changes may develop gradually over several weeks as the body processes the affected cells. The result and timeline vary according to the treatment area, tissue thickness and individual response. Is cryolipolysis uncomfortable?
Clients commonly feel cold, pulling or pressure when treatment begins, followed by temporary numbness. Tenderness, bruising or sensitivity may occur after treatment. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness or numbness may occur. Are results permanent?
Affected fat cells processed by the body do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with future weight gain, so stable weight and healthy lifestyle habits remain important. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine combines: 360-degree controlled cooling Multiple professional applicator sizes Adjustable 5°C to −11°C temperature settings Professional multi-area body-contouring applications Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its applicators, treatment protocols and professional training. Order Your 360 Cryolipolysis Machine and Request a Quote
Cooling Level
Recommended Application
Mild Cooling
Initial assessment and comfort-focused protocols
Moderate Cooling
General professional body-contouring treatments
Lower Temperature
Appropriately selected protocols for suitable tissue
Customized Cooling
Treatment-specific settings based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Applicator
Intended Aesthetic Application
Upper abdomen
Suitable large applicator
Abdominal-contour refinement
Lower abdomen
Suitable large applicator
Localized body contouring
Waist and flanks
Medium or contoured applicator
Side-body contour refinement
Inner thighs
Suitable medium applicator
Lower-body contouring
Outer thighs
Suitable medium or large applicator
Thigh-contour refinement
Upper arms
Suitable small applicator
Targeted arm contouring
Upper and lower back
Suitable applicator
Localized back treatment
Bra-line area
Suitable small applicator
Targeted contour refinement
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine
Product Type
Professional non-invasive body-contouring system
Technology
Controlled cryolipolysis cooling
Cooling Range
5°C to −11°C
Coverage Design
360-degree applicator cooling
Applicator Options
Multiple sizes for different body areas
Session Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes per treatment area
Recommended Protocol
Commonly 1–3 sessions per area, depending on assessment
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms
Safety Features
Automatic temperature control, protective membranes and safety monitoring
Control Interface
Digital display with preset cryolipolysis programs
Power Supply
110V–240V
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
From $1,499.00
Professional Portable 7D HIFU System
Dual-Handle Technology for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is a professional dual-handle system designed for non-surgical facial treatments, skin firming and body-contouring applications.
A dedicated Face Handle and Body Handle provide seven cartridge depths ranging from 1.5 mm to 13 mm. This allows trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for the face, neck or larger body areas.
Its 15-inch touchscreen, universal voltage and portable desktop design make the system suitable for beauty salons, med spas, aesthetic clinics and qualified independent practitioners.
Two dedicated handles | Seven cartridge depths | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
One Portable System for Face and Body Treatments Face Handle
The Face Handle is supplied with four treatment depths for professional facial and neck applications: 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm The available cartridges allow trained operators to develop treatment protocols for different facial areas and tissue depths. Common applications include: Facial skin firming Jawline definition Neck treatments Brow-area lifting Improvement in the appearance of fine lines Facial contour refinement Body Handle
The Body Handle uses deeper cartridges for professional body-contouring and skin-firming applications: 6.0 mm 9.0 mm 13.0 mm These depths are intended for larger treatment areas such as: Abdomen Waist and flanks Upper and lower back Upper arms Thighs Hips Buttocks Cartridge selection and energy parameters must be determined by a trained operator after completing a client consultation. Dedicated 5.5 MHz Eye-Area Cartridge
The 2.0 mm cartridge operates at 5.5 MHz and is designed for precise treatments around appropriate areas near the eyes. It may be incorporated into professional protocols focused on: Appearance of crow’s feet Fine lines around the eye area Localized skin firming Delicate facial areas requiring precise energy placement Treatments near the eyes require advanced knowledge of facial anatomy, correct cartridge positioning and strict adherence to the manufacturer’s safety instructions. The cartridge must never be applied directly over the eye, eyelid or any area prohibited by the operating manual. Seven Treatment Depths for Greater Flexibility The table provides general positioning information only. Treatment depth must be selected according to the client’s anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional protocol. How 7D HIFU Technology Works
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at a selected treatment depth without creating a surgical incision. When applied correctly, controlled energy is directed below the skin’s surface to support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling response. Professional HIFU treatments are commonly incorporated into aesthetic programs focused on skin firming, lifting and contour refinement. The dual-handle design separates facial and body applications, helping operators select the correct handpiece and cartridge for each treatment area. Individual responses and outcomes vary. Results depend on factors such as age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and the protocol used. Professional Treatment Applications
Treatment suitability should be confirmed through a complete consultation and contraindication assessment. Build a Complete Face and Body Service Menu
Facial HIFU Treatments
Use the 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges to develop professional facial treatment protocols at different depths. Precision Eye-Area Treatments
The specialized 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge provides an additional service option for suitable areas around the eyes. Jawline and Neck Contouring
Selectable facial cartridge depths support structured treatments for the lower face, jawline and neck. Body-Contouring Treatments
The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm body cartridges allow operators to work with different body areas and tissue depths. Combination Treatment Plans
Qualified professionals may incorporate face and body services into structured treatment plans. Each area must be assessed and treated according to its individual requirements. Portable Design for Flexible Treatment Spaces
At approximately 17 kg net weight, the system provides the functionality of a dual-handle face and body platform in a portable desktop format. This makes it suitable for: Clinics with limited treatment-room space Beauty salons offering multiple services Practitioners working across different rooms Med spas seeking a compact HIFU system Qualified mobile practitioners with appropriate transport procedures Portable does not mean handheld or suitable for casual transportation. The machine should be moved, packed and installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Professional Operating Controls
The machine provides a large touchscreen interface and adjustable treatment parameters for controlled professional operation. Key operating features include: 15-inch color touchscreen Dedicated Face and Body Handles Continuous and single-shot modes Adjustable energy output Adjustable dot spacing Seven treatment depths Cartridge capacity of 10,000–20,000 shots Universal AC 100–240 V input 200 W rated power All parameters should be selected according to the treatment area, cartridge depth, client condition and recommended professional protocol. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications. 2. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The Face or Body Handle is selected, followed by the cartridge depth appropriate for the treatment area. 3. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed, marked where required and prepared using the recommended coupling medium. 4. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the energy, dot spacing and single-shot or continuous mode according to the approved protocol. 5. Controlled Energy Delivery
The treatment is performed using correct positioning and technique. Client comfort and skin response should be monitored throughout the session. 6. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, tenderness or tingling may occur. Recovery experience varies according to the area treated, energy settings and individual response. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated or vary according to the production configuration. Request the current technical datasheet before ordering. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One portable 7D HIFU touchscreen console One Face Handle One Body Handle Power cable suitable for the selected market Face Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Body Cartridges
One 6.0 mm cartridge One 9.0 mm cartridge One 13.0 mm cartridge Documentation and Support
English user manual Setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final package contents and cartridge shot capacity should be confirmed on the quotation before payment. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Equipment installation Touchscreen navigation Handle and cartridge installation Cartridge-depth selection Basic parameter adjustment Facial and body treatment protocols Eye-area safety considerations Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace any professional qualification, anatomy training or license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects involving: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original Face and Body Handles Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty or replacement conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Misuse or incorrect operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or transportation Normal cartridge depletion Damage caused by dropping a handle Blocked, damaged or incorrectly installed cartridges Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and must only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment. HIFU treatment may not be appropriate for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infections or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery or injectable treatment in the area Other contraindications identified in the operating manual Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The portable 7D HIFU system is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Appropriately equipped mobile aesthetic professionals The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
Dedicated Face and Body Handles
Separate handles help operators select the correct equipment for facial and deeper body applications. Seven Cartridge Depths
A complete 1.5–13 mm cartridge range supports multiple face, neck and body treatment areas. Specialized Eye-Area Option
The 2.0 mm, 5.5 MHz cartridge provides an additional precision option for appropriately selected areas around the eyes. High Cartridge Capacity
Cartridges are rated for approximately 10,000–20,000 shots, depending on the cartridge and production configuration. Portable Professional Design
The 17 kg desktop format can be repositioned more easily than a large floor-standing system. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the Face Handle and Body Handle?
The Face Handle uses 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for facial and neck applications. The Body Handle uses deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring treatments. What is special about the 2.0 mm cartridge?
The 2.0 mm cartridge operates at 5.5 MHz and is intended for precise treatment of suitable areas around the eyes. It must only be used by a trained operator with appropriate knowledge of facial anatomy. How many shots does each cartridge provide?
The supplied specifications indicate approximately 10,000–20,000 shots per cartridge. Confirm the capacity of each cartridge before ordering. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, energy setting and individual sensitivity. Clients may experience warmth, tingling or temporary discomfort. Treatment should not be described as completely painless. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. When can clients expect results?
Some clients may notice early changes, while tissue-remodeling responses can continue over the following weeks or months. Results and timelines cannot be guaranteed. Is this machine suitable for mobile practitioners?
Its portable design may suit qualified mobile professionals. Safe transportation, stable installation, hygiene control, insurance and compliance with local regulations remain essential. Does the machine work with international power supplies?
The system is specified for AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz. The correct regional plug and electrical configuration should be confirmed before ordering. Is training included?
Remote setup and operating guidance are included. Operators must still meet all professional qualification and licensing requirements applicable in their market. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and RoHS documentation?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Services with Portable Face and Body HIFU
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine combines two dedicated handles and seven treatment depths within one compact professional platform. Use it to develop treatment services for: Facial lifting and firming Precision eye-area treatments Jawline and neck contouring Professional body contouring Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, the complete technical datasheet, cartridge information and purchasing guidance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Cartridge depth
Handle
Intended area
1.5 mm
Face Handle
Superficial facial applications
2.0 mm
Face Handle
Precision and eye-area protocols
3.0 mm
Face Handle
Facial and neck treatments
4.5 mm
Face Handle
Deeper facial and jawline protocols
6.0 mm
Body Handle
Shallow body-treatment areas
9.0 mm
Body Handle
Medium-depth body applications
13.0 mm
Body Handle
Deeper body-contouring protocols
Treatment category
Common areas
Intended aesthetic application
Facial rejuvenation
Forehead, cheeks and lower face
Skin firming and contour refinement
Eye-area treatments
Suitable areas around the eyes
Fine-line appearance and localized firming
Jawline contouring
Lower face and jawline
Definition and tightening
Neck treatments
Neck and submental area
Firming and contour refinement
Body contouring
Abdomen, waist and back
Non-invasive contouring programs
Body firming
Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks
Skin-firming treatments
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional portable 7D HIFU machine
Technology
Focused ultrasound for face and body applications
Treatment handles
One Face Handle and one Body Handle
Total cartridges
Seven
Face cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Eye-area cartridge
2.0 mm depth at 5.5 MHz
Body cartridges
6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Standard frequencies
4 MHz and 7 MHz
Adjustable energy
1.0–3.0 J maximum
Cartridge capacity
Approximately 10,000–20,000 shots
Dot spacing
1–2 mm, adjustable in 0.1 mm increments
Operating modes
Continuous and single-shot
Display
15-inch touchscreen
Rated power
200 W
Input voltage
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Net weight
Approximately 17 kg
Packaged weight
Approximately 20 kg
Package dimensions
58 × 36 × 52 cm
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Declared compliance
CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model
Receives in 7 days.
From $1,249.00
Professional Thermal Shaping, Sculpting, HIFU and Microneedling System
Four Configurations for Professional Body Contouring and Facial Rejuvenation
The Wikbeauty Hot Plastic & Fine Carving Multifunctional HIFU Machine is a configurable professional aesthetic platform developed for beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics.
Its touchscreen console is available with four handle configurations, allowing buyers to select the treatment technologies that best match their services. Depending on the configuration, the system supports thermal body shaping, skin firming, facial HIFU treatments and microneedling-based skin rejuvenation.
Choose a single-handle system for a specialized service or a dual-handle configuration for a more comprehensive treatment menu.
Four configurations | Touchscreen control | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Technologies Available on One Professional Platform Thermal Shaping
The Thermal Shaping handle is designed for non-invasive body-contouring treatments on areas with localized fat accumulation. It offers three adjustable energy-output patterns and two cartridge depths, allowing the operator to adapt treatments according to the selected body area and tissue thickness. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist and flanks Upper and lower back Upper arms Thighs Legs Buttocks Sculpting
The Sculpting handle delivers focused thermal energy at selectable depths to support skin firming and body-contour refinement. Cartridges in 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths allow trained operators to adapt treatments for different areas and professional protocols. US-Version HIFU
The US-Version HIFU handle is designed for non-surgical facial lifting and skin-tightening treatments. Common applications include: Facial contouring Jawline definition Brow-area lifting Neck treatments Improvement in the appearance of fine lines Overall skin-firming programs Microneedling
The Microneedling handle is supplied with multiple pin configurations for customized skin-rejuvenation treatments. Available options include: 10-needle cartridge 25-needle cartridge 64-needle cartridge Microcrystal tip The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Configuration for Your Business
The system is offered in four configurations. The included handles and cartridges depend on the option selected at the time of purchase. Configuration 1: Thermal Shaping
A body-focused configuration for non-invasive contouring treatments. Included technology: One Thermal Shaping handle 0.8 mm cartridge 13 mm cartridge 576-dot, 360-dot and 300-dot output patterns Recommended for: Body-contouring studios Abdomen and waist treatments Back, arm and thigh contouring Businesses adding a specialized body-shaping service Configuration 2: Sculpting
A focused configuration for skin firming and contour refinement. Included technology: One Sculpting handle 1.5 mm cartridge 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge Recommended for: Skin-firming treatments Contour-refinement services Face and body treatment programs Clinics focused on non-surgical tightening Configuration 3: Sculpting and Thermal Shaping
The complete Hot Plastic and Fine Carving combination for clinics that want to offer both body shaping and skin firming. Included technology: One Thermal Shaping handle 0.8 mm and 13 mm Thermal Shaping cartridges One Sculpting handle 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm Sculpting cartridges Recommended for: Comprehensive body-contouring programs Localized body-shaping treatments Skin-firming services Clinics expanding their non-invasive treatment menu Configuration 4: US-Version HIFU and Microneedling
A face-focused configuration combining HIFU lifting with customizable microneedling treatments. Included technology: One US-Version HIFU handle 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm HIFU cartridges One Microneedling handle 10-needle, 25-needle and 64-needle cartridges Microcrystal tip Recommended for: Facial lifting treatments Jawline and neck contouring Fine-line treatments Skin-texture and rejuvenation programs Precision Output for Customized Thermal Shaping
The Thermal Shaping handle offers three output-dot patterns. Each pattern is intended for a different treatment requirement. The available patterns give trained operators greater control over treatment coverage and energy placement. The correct pattern must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area. Adjustable Treatment Depths
Different cartridges are provided for different technologies and treatment depths. Thermal Shaping Cartridges
0.8 mm 13 mm Sculpting Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm US-Version HIFU Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Professional Face and Body Applications
The available treatments depend on the configuration selected. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and suitability. The appropriate technology and cartridge are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The selected handle and cartridge are installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the handle is correctly connected before beginning the session. 3. Parameter Selection
Treatment depth, energy level, output pattern and other relevant settings are selected according to the treatment area and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the selected handle to the treatment area following the recommended technique. Session duration varies according to the technology, selected area and protocol. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the treatment, the area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions. Some clients may return to their normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling or other expected responses may occur, particularly after HIFU or microneedling procedures. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines a clean touchscreen interface with configurable treatment technologies for streamlined use in a professional setting. Key operating advantages include: Touchscreen control panel Four selectable handle configurations Face and body treatment options Multiple cartridge depths Three Thermal Shaping output patterns Single- and dual-handle configurations Compact multifunctional platform Treatment flexibility for different business models Technical Specifications
Machine dimensions, weight, power input and other specifications may vary by configuration. Contact Wikbeauty for the complete technical datasheet before ordering. What Is Included?
Package contents depend on the selected configuration. Standard Equipment
One touchscreen main unit Handle or handles included with the selected configuration Applicable treatment cartridges or microneedling tips Treatment-handle connection components Power cable Starter conductive gel, where applicable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Machine setup guidance Safety and operating instructions Treatment-protocol guidance Basic cleaning and maintenance instructions Please confirm your preferred configuration before ordering to ensure that the correct handles and cartridges are included. Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Handle and cartridge installation Control-interface operation Treatment-parameter selection Basic treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Multifunctional HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original treatment handles Handle-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handle operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cartridges, tips and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic or metallic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Conditions affecting normal healing Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Microneedling cartridges and tips must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Body-contouring studios Skin-rejuvenation professionals Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their face and body treatment services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose This Multifunctional System?
Select Only the Technologies You Need
Four configurations allow buyers to match the equipment to their current service menu and budget. Combine Face and Body Treatments
Choose a body-focused system, a facial-rejuvenation system or a dual-technology body-contouring configuration. Work at Multiple Treatment Depths
A range of cartridges supports different treatment areas and professional protocols. Expand Your Service Menu
One configurable platform can support body contouring, skin firming, facial HIFU or microneedling services, depending on the option ordered. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year limited warranty, remote training and ongoing technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the four configurations?
Configuration 1 includes Thermal Shaping for body contouring. Configuration 2 includes Sculpting for skin firming. Configuration 3 combines Thermal Shaping and Sculpting. Configuration 4 combines US-Version HIFU with Microneedling for facial rejuvenation. Which configuration is best for body contouring?
Configuration 3 offers the most complete body-focused combination because it includes both Thermal Shaping and Sculpting technologies. Which configuration is best for facial treatments?
Configuration 4 is the face-focused option. It combines the US-Version HIFU handle with multiple microneedling cartridge options. Is this machine a replacement for surgical liposuction?
No. This is professional aesthetic equipment intended for non-invasive body-contouring treatments. It should not be represented as equivalent to or a replacement for surgical liposuction. Do treatments require downtime?
Downtime depends on the technology, treatment intensity and individual client response. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, sensitivity or swelling may occur. How quickly will clients see results?
Results vary according to the treatment performed, client condition, treatment parameters and individual biological response. A fixed result or treatment timeline should not be guaranteed. Is training included?
Remote setup and operating guidance are included. Operators must also meet any training, qualification and licensing requirements applicable in their market. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and RoHS documentation?
CE and RoHS is included Build the Right Treatment System for Your Business
Choose the configuration that best matches your professional treatment menu: Thermal Shaping Sculpting Sculpting and Thermal Shaping US-Version HIFU and Microneedling Contact Wikbeauty before ordering if you need help comparing the handles, cartridges or intended applications. Select Your Configuration and Request a Quote
Output pattern
Recommended application
576 dots
Full treatment pattern for broader body areas
360 dots
More targeted output for the navel area
300 dots
Areas where the fat layer is under 25 mm thick
Treatment area
Applicable technology
Intended aesthetic application
Abdomen and waist
Thermal Shaping
Non-invasive body contouring
Back and flanks
Thermal Shaping
Localized contour refinement
Arms and thighs
Thermal Shaping or Sculpting
Body shaping and firming
Buttocks and legs
Thermal Shaping or Sculpting
Contouring and skin firming
Face and jawline
US-Version HIFU
Facial contouring and tightening
Brow and neck
US-Version HIFU
Non-surgical lifting treatments
Facial skin
Microneedling
Texture and tone improvement
Targeted skin areas
Microneedling
Professional rejuvenation protocols
Specification
Details
Product type
Multifunctional professional HIFU and aesthetic system
Available configurations
Thermal Shaping; Sculpting; Sculpting with Thermal Shaping; US-Version HIFU with Microneedling
Control interface
Touchscreen control panel
Thermal Shaping cartridges
0.8 mm and 13 mm
Thermal Shaping patterns
576 dots, 360 dots and 300 dots
Sculpting cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Sculpting thermal setting
Up to 65°C, according to the supplied specification
US-Version HIFU cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Microneedling options
10-needle, 25-needle, 64-needle and microcrystal tip
Intended applications
Body contouring, skin firming, facial HIFU and skin rejuvenation
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Documentation
English user manual and operating guidance
Service
24 hours online service
Declared compliance
CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model
Receives in 7 days.
From $1,699.00
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and Aesthetic Treatment System
Five Dedicated Technologies for Facial Rejuvenation, Body Contouring and Intimate Care
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 Multifunctional HIFU Machine combines five professional aesthetic technologies within one touchscreen platform.
With dedicated handles for 8D HIFU, Liposonic body contouring, RF microneedling, Radar Carving and intimate care, the system allows beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics to expand their treatment menus without purchasing multiple standalone machines.
Each technology has its own handle, cartridges and adjustable treatment parameters, giving trained operators greater control when developing professional face and body treatment protocols.
Five technologies | Five dedicated handles | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Five Professional Technologies in One System
8D HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at selectable depths for professional facial and neck treatments.
It is designed to support non-surgical treatment programs focused on:
-
Facial lifting
-
Skin firming
-
Jawline definition
-
Neck treatments
-
Brow-area lifting
-
Improvement in the appearance of fine lines
The handle is supplied with 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for treatments at different tissue depths.
Liposonic Body Contouring
The Liposonic handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at deeper levels for professional body-contouring applications.
With 8 mm and 13 mm cartridges, it is designed for larger body areas such as:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Upper and lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
The correct cartridge, energy setting and treatment technique should be selected following a complete client consultation.
RF Microneedling
The RF Microneedling handle combines controlled microneedling with bipolar radiofrequency energy.
It is designed to support professional treatments focused on:
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Enlarged-pore appearance
-
Uneven skin tone
-
Fine-line appearance
-
General skin rejuvenation
-
Targeted facial and body protocols
Four cartridge options allow operators to adapt the treatment to different areas and professional objectives:
-
10-pin
-
25-pin
-
64-pin
-
Nano-pin
Radar Carving
The Radar Carving handle is designed for focused aesthetic treatments at selectable depths.
With 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges, it can be incorporated into professional skin-firming and contour-refinement protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Facial contouring
-
Jawline definition
-
Skin firming
-
Localized contour refinement
-
Complementary treatments alongside other technologies
Intimate Care
The dedicated Intimate Care handle expands the machine’s applications into professional intimate wellness and rejuvenation services.
It includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges and must only be used by appropriately trained professionals following strict consultation, hygiene, consent and safety procedures.
Availability and permitted use of intimate treatments may vary by country or region.
One Console, Five Dedicated Handles
Each technology is delivered through its own dedicated treatment handle.
This provides several practical advantages:
-
No need to purchase five separate machines
-
Reduced treatment-room floor space
-
Centralized touchscreen operation
-
Dedicated cartridges for each application
-
Easier organization of face and body services
-
Greater flexibility when expanding a treatment menu
-
Multiple cross-service and package opportunities
Each treatment remains technically distinct. Operators must follow the correct protocol for the handle, cartridge and treatment area selected.
Professional Face and Body Applications
| Treatment category | Technology | Common applications |
|---|---|---|
| Facial lifting | 8D HIFU | Face, neck, jawline and brow area |
| Body contouring | Liposonic | Abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs |
| Skin rejuvenation | RF Microneedling | Texture, tone, pores and fine-line appearance |
| Contour refinement | Radar Carving | Facial and localized firming treatments |
| Intimate wellness | Intimate Care | Specialized professional protocols |
Treatment outcomes vary according to the client’s condition, treatment parameters, treatment schedule and individual response.
Adjustable Cartridges for Different Treatment Depths
8D HIFU Cartridges 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Liposonic Body Cartridges
8 mm 13 mm Radar Carving Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Intimate Care Cartridges
3.0 mm 4.5 mm RF Microneedling Cartridges
10-pin 25-pin 64-pin Nano-pin Cartridge depth and treatment parameters must be selected by a trained operator according to the treatment area, client suitability and recommended protocol. Build a More Complete Treatment Menu Facial Lifting and Firming
The 8D HIFU and Radar Carving handles can support professional treatment programs focused on facial contouring, skin firming and jawline definition. Advanced Skin Rejuvenation
The RF Microneedling handle adds customizable treatments for skin texture, pore appearance, fine lines and overall skin quality. Professional Body Contouring
The Liposonic handle provides deeper treatment depths for larger body areas, including the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs. Intimate Wellness Services
The dedicated Intimate Care handle allows qualified providers to add specialized intimate rejuvenation treatments where legally permitted. Combination Treatment Planning
Where appropriate, trained professionals may develop treatment plans using more than one technology. Each treatment should be performed according to its individual protocol rather than applying multiple technologies indiscriminately. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and contraindications. The appropriate technology is selected only after confirming suitability. 2. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The correct handle and cartridge depth are selected according to the treatment area and intended protocol. 3. System Preparation
The handle is attached and checked before use. Conductive gel or other required treatment materials are applied where specified in the operating instructions. 4. Parameter Selection
The operator adjusts the energy output and other available settings according to the technology, cartridge depth, treatment area and client tolerance. 5. Controlled Treatment
The selected handle is applied using the recommended technique. Treatment duration depends on the technology, body area and professional protocol. 6. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, tenderness or other expected responses may occur depending on the technology used. Recovery experience varies between individuals. Designed for Daily Professional Operation
The system brings all five technologies together through a 15-inch color touchscreen interface. Professional operating features include: Five dedicated treatment handles Large color touchscreen Adjustable energy settings Multiple treatment cartridges Facial and body applications Universal AC 110–220 V input Compact multifunctional design Dedicated protocols for each technology Technical Specifications
Technical specifications may be updated or vary according to production configuration. Request the current technical datasheet and electrical requirements before ordering. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One 5-in-1 touchscreen console One 8D HIFU handle One Liposonic handle One RF Microneedling handle One Radar Carving handle One Intimate Care handle Power cable Starter conductive gel, where applicable 8D HIFU Cartridges
One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Liposonic Cartridges
One 8 mm cartridge One 13 mm cartridge Radar Carving Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Intimate Care Cartridges
One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge RF Microneedling Cartridges
10-pin cartridge 25-pin cartridge 64-pin cartridge Nano-pin cartridge Package contents should be confirmed against the final quotation before payment. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance covering: Machine installation and initial setup Touchscreen navigation Handle and cartridge installation Basic parameter selection Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic fault diagnosis and troubleshooting Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 Multifunctional HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects involving: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original treatment handles Handle connectors Other eligible original components Cartridges, microneedling tips and other consumable or limited-use components may have different coverage terms. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided troubleshooting Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage Normal wear of cartridges and consumables Damage caused by unsuitable treatment materials Failure to follow the operating manual Unauthorized transportation damage The order number, machine serial number, photos and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be used by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation, informed consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic or metallic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infections Open wounds Severe inflammatory skin conditions Conditions that affect normal healing Recent surgery in the treatment area Use of certain medications Other contraindications identified in the operating manual Additional Microneedling Requirements
RF microneedling must be performed using appropriate hygiene, sterilization and infection-control procedures. Single-use components must not be reused. Additional Intimate Care Requirements
Intimate treatments require appropriate professional training, privacy procedures, informed consent and strict hygiene controls. Operators must confirm that the treatment is permitted within their professional scope and local regulations. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This multifunctional system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their treatment services The machine is not designed for casual, unsupervised home use. Why Choose a 5-in-1 Aesthetic System?
Five Technologies from One Console
Offer facial lifting, body contouring, RF microneedling, contour refinement and intimate care without maintaining five separate control units. Dedicated Handle for Each Application
Each technology has a purpose-specific handle and cartridge system. Face and Body Treatment Flexibility
Build individual services or structured treatment programs around different client concerns. More Efficient Use of Space
One multifunctional platform requires less floor space than several standalone machines. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes remote training, ongoing technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “5-in-1” mean?
The system includes five dedicated technologies: 8D HIFU, Liposonic, RF Microneedling, Radar Carving and Intimate Care. Each technology has its own treatment handle. Can multiple technologies be used in one treatment plan?
Qualified operators may develop combination treatment plans where clinically appropriate. Treatment order, timing and compatibility must be based on proper training, client suitability and the manufacturer’s protocols. What is the difference between 8D HIFU and Liposonic?
The supplied 8D HIFU cartridges are intended for shallower facial and neck applications. The 8 mm and 13 mm Liposonic cartridges are designed for deeper body-contouring applications. What is Radar Carving used for?
Radar Carving uses cartridges at 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths for professional firming and contour-refinement treatments. Is the machine suitable for beginners?
The touchscreen system is designed for straightforward operation, but the treatments require professional knowledge. Operators must complete appropriate training and satisfy local qualification requirements. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience depends on the technology, treatment intensity and individual client response. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. “Zero downtime” should not be guaranteed. When can clients expect results?
Results and timelines vary. The selected technology, treatment settings, client condition and individual biological response all influence the outcome. Is training included?
Remote setup, operating guidance and training materials are included. This does not replace any locally required professional qualification or license. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components. Consumables, misuse, accidental damage and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine have CE and RoHS documentation?
CE and RoHS Expand Your Treatment Menu with One Professional Platform
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 Multifunctional HIFU Machine brings five complementary aesthetic technologies into one compact system: 8D HIFU Liposonic RF Microneedling Radar Carving Intimate Care Contact Wikbeauty for the current technical datasheet, cartridge details, training information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and aesthetic system
Included technologies
8D HIFU, Liposonic, RF Microneedling, Radar Carving and Intimate Care
Treatment handles
Five dedicated handles
Control interface
15-inch color touchscreen
8D HIFU cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
8D HIFU energy output
0.1–2.0 J
8D HIFU cartridge capacity
Up to 10,000 shots
Liposonic cartridges
8 mm and 13 mm
Liposonic energy output
1–20 J
Liposonic cartridge capacity
Up to 500 shots
Radar Carving cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Radar Carving energy output
1–8 J
Radar Carving cartridge capacity
Up to 62,000 shots
Intimate Care cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Intimate Care energy output
0.1–1.5 J
Intimate Care cartridge capacity
Up to 10,000 shots
RF Microneedling cartridges
10-pin, 25-pin, 64-pin and Nano-pin
RF frequency
2 MHz bipolar
RF power
10–200 W
Input voltage
AC 110–220 V
Fuse
5 A
Package dimensions
47 × 37 × 51 cm
Package weight
15.9 kg
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Declared compliance
CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model
Receives in 7 days.
$560.00
Professional Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Non-Invasive Fat Reduction, Body Slimming, and Contouring System
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support targeted fat reduction, inch loss, and improved body shape without surgery or downtime.
Using 650nm low-level laser therapy, the system delivers controlled red-light energy through multiple laser pads positioned over selected treatment areas. This energy supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells as free fatty acids and glycerol, which are then processed naturally by the body.
With an intelligent touchscreen, multiple body applicators, and universal 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for slimming salons, spas, wellness centers, fitness clinics, and professional aesthetic practices.
650nm Lipo Laser | Multiple Treatment Pads | 20–40-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Lipo Laser Fat-Reduction Technology
The machine uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to target localized fat deposits without surgery, needles, or anesthesia. Multiple laser pads deliver controlled energy across the selected treatment area. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction treatments Waist and abdominal contouring Arm and thigh slimming Hip, flank, and back shaping Buttock contour refinement Body Sculpting and Inch-Loss Treatments
The flexible laser-pad system allows operators to position applicators around different body zones. This supports customized slimming programs based on the client’s proportions and treatment objectives. Common applications include: Waistline definition Abdominal contour improvement Arm and thigh reshaping Hip and flank contouring Multi-area body-sculpting programs Cellulite and Skin-Quality Support
Lipo laser treatments can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve the appearance of uneven skin texture while supporting smoother and firmer-looking skin. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance reduction Skin-texture improvement Firmness and elasticity support Post-slimming skin conditioning Body-smoothing treatments Select the Right Program for Each Client Targeted Fat-Reduction Program
Designed for clients with localized areas of stubborn fat that may be resistant to regular diet and exercise. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waist, hips, thighs, arms, back, and flanks. Recommended for: Clients seeking focused treatment of one or two specific body areas. Complete Body-Contouring Program
A multi-area protocol that uses several laser pads to support balanced body shaping and improved proportions. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, thighs and hips, arms and back, or other compatible area combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking a more comprehensive body-sculpting course. Cellulite and Skin-Smoothing Program
A treatment program focused on the appearance of uneven texture, cellulite, and reduced skin firmness. Recommended applications: Thighs, hips, buttocks, abdomen, and upper arms. Recommended for: Clients who want smoother-looking skin alongside body-contouring benefits. Maintenance and Shape-Management Program
A flexible follow-up program designed to support previously achieved contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated body areas requiring periodic maintenance. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial treatment course and want ongoing body-contouring support. Adjustable Laser and Treatment Settings Treatment settings, session frequency, and pad positioning should be selected according to the client’s assessment, treatment area, comfort, and professional operating protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
Treatment pads can be positioned on suitable upper-body zones where localized fat deposits or reduced definition are present. Treatment objectives include: Upper-arm contouring Back-fat reduction support Flank shaping Waistline definition Improved upper-body proportions Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for professional lipo laser body-contouring programs. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal contouring Waistline slimming Localized inch-loss support Flank and side shaping Improved midsection definition Lower-Body Areas
Multiple pads can be arranged across compatible lower-body treatment zones. Treatment objectives include: Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Hip shaping Buttock contour refinement Cellulite-appearance improvement Smoother-looking lower-body contours Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s treatment goals, medical history, lifestyle, current body condition, and potential contraindications. Step 2: Body Assessment
Identify suitable treatment areas, document measurements when required, and create a personalized treatment plan. Step 3: Laser-Pad Placement
Position the laser pads securely over the selected treatment areas according to the operating protocol. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the appropriate treatment time and operating settings using the intelligent touchscreen interface. A typical session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, nutrition, activity, and treatment-course guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine combines a straightforward operating system with flexible applicator placement, making it suitable for a variety of professional body-contouring businesses. Key advantages include: Non-invasive treatment technology Multiple laser pads for flexible positioning Intelligent touchscreen operation Single-area and multi-area treatment capability Approximately 20–40-minute sessions No surgical recovery period 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year warranty Technical Specifications Treatment experiences and visible outcomes may vary according to the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment area, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. Results should not be presented as guaranteed. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine Multiple laser-pad body applicators 1 × Compatible power cable 1 × Warranty card Standard accessories required for machine operation Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guidance Operating instructions Laser-pad placement guidance Treatment protocol training Safety and maintenance instructions After-sales technical support Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional operating guidance to help owners and treatment providers use the machine confidently and consistently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and initial setup Touchscreen operation Laser-pad positioning Treatment-area selection Session configuration Client assessment procedures Safety and contraindication screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Troubleshooting assistance Treatment-protocol guidance Ongoing after-sales support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults under normal operating conditions. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair instructions are issued. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting assistance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair guidance Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication throughout the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty support team with the machine model and order information. Provide a clear description of the issue. Submit photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the machine. Follow the provided troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Water damage or unsuitable storage conditions Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and contraindication screening should be completed before treatment. The machine should be operated only by trained users following the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Serious cardiovascular conditions Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Severe liver or kidney conditions Uncontrolled diabetes Blood-clotting disorders Active infection or inflammation Open wounds or damaged skin in the treatment area Recent surgery in the intended treatment area Photosensitivity or use of photosensitizing medication Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with medical concerns should consult a qualified healthcare professional before treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a client consultation before every initial treatment. Inspect the machine, cables, and laser pads before use. Clean and disinfect applicators according to the manual. Position laser pads securely without excessive pressure. Do not apply pads over open wounds or inflamed skin. Do not exceed the recommended treatment time. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Stop treatment if the client experiences an unexpected reaction. Keep the machine away from excessive moisture and heat. Use a stable and correctly grounded power supply. Follow the recommended cleaning and maintenance schedule. Keep accurate treatment records when required. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine is suitable for: Body-slimming salons Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Wellness centers Day spas and medical spas Fitness and body-transformation centers Weight-management businesses Professional body-contouring providers Users must follow the supplied operating instructions, complete appropriate training, and comply with local regulations governing aesthetic equipment. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine? 1. Professional 650nm Lipo Laser Technology
The system uses 650nm low-level laser therapy to support non-invasive fat-reduction and body-contouring treatments. 2. Multiple Laser-Pad Applicators
Flexible pad placement allows professionals to target different body areas and create customized treatment programs. 3. Non-Invasive Client Experience
Treatments require no surgery, needles, anesthesia, or extended recovery period, making the service convenient for suitable clients. 4. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, treatment training, technical assistance, and after-sales support. 5. Three-Year Warranty and Certified Quality
The system includes a three-year professional warranty and is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine work?
The system uses 650nm low-level laser energy delivered through body applicators. The treatment supports the release of stored triglycerides from fat cells into free fatty acids and glycerol, which are processed naturally by the body. Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. Lipo laser is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that does not require surgery, injections, or anesthesia. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Most clients describe the treatment as comfortable and relaxing. Individual sensitivity can vary, so client comfort should be monitored throughout every session. Q: How long does one session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the treatment area and selected protocol. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A complete course generally includes approximately 8–12 sessions. The final recommendation should be based on the client’s assessment and treatment objectives. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice changes after the first few sessions, while more developed results usually require completion of the recommended treatment course. Individual outcomes vary. Q: Which body areas can be treated?
Compatible areas include the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks. Q: Can multiple areas be treated during one session?
The multiple-pad system supports simultaneous placement across compatible treatment zones. Operators must follow the recommended pad arrangement and treatment protocol. Q: Is there any downtime?
Lipo laser treatments generally do not require a surgical recovery period. Suitable clients can normally return to their usual activities after treatment. Q: Can the machine help improve the appearance of cellulite?
The system can be incorporated into professional programs designed to improve body contours and the appearance of uneven skin texture. Q: Does the machine provide skin-tightening benefits?
Treatments can support smoother and firmer-looking skin as part of a structured body-contouring program. Q: Are lipo laser results permanent?
Results depend on the client’s lifestyle, nutrition, physical activity, treatment course, and weight stability. The service should not be marketed as guaranteeing permanent fat loss. Q: What should clients do after treatment?
Clients are generally advised to remain hydrated, maintain balanced nutrition, and follow appropriate activity and aftercare guidance provided by the treatment professional. Q: Is the machine suitable for every client?
No. Every client should complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can the machine be used on all skin types?
Low-level laser therapy may be suitable for a broad range of skin types, but individual assessment and contraindication screening remain necessary. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Professional setup, operating, treatment-protocol, safety, and maintenance guidance are included. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Q: What is included with the machine?
The package includes the main machine, multiple laser-pad applicators, a compatible power cable, a user manual and training guide, a warranty card, and standard operating accessories. Add Professional Lipo Laser Slimming to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine gives salons, spas, wellness centers, and aesthetic clinics a versatile solution for non-invasive fat reduction, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-quality treatments. Five key benefits: Professional 650nm low-level laser technology Multiple pads for flexible body-area treatment Non-invasive 20–40-minute sessions Intelligent touchscreen operation CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Laser Wavelength
650nm red light
Supports professional low-level laser body-contouring treatments
Treatment Time
Adjustable within the recommended 20–40-minute range
Allows sessions to be adapted to the selected area and protocol
Laser Pads
Multiple body applicators
Supports simultaneous treatment of compatible body areas
Treatment Area
Single-area or multi-area positioning
Enables targeted and comprehensive body-contouring programs
Treatment Course
Approximately 8–12 sessions recommended
Supports progressive results through a structured treatment plan
Control Interface
Intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient treatment selection and operating control
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Slimming
Abdomen
Support localized fat reduction and improved abdominal contour
Waistline Contouring
Waist and flanks
Create a more defined waistline
Arm Slimming
Upper arms
Improve arm shape and reduce the appearance of localized fullness
Thigh Contouring
Inner and outer thighs
Support smoother and more balanced leg contours
Hip Shaping
Hips
Improve overall body proportions
Back Contouring
Upper and lower back
Target localized fat deposits and improve back definition
Buttock Contouring
Buttocks
Refine shape and improve surrounding contours
Cellulite Care
Thighs, hips, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of uneven skin texture
Skin-Firming Support
Multiple body areas
Support smoother and firmer-looking skin
Multi-Area Sculpting
Combined body zones
Deliver a customized body-contouring program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Lipo Laser Slimming Machine
Technology
Low-Level Laser Therapy
Laser Wavelength
650nm red light
Primary Functions
Fat reduction, body slimming, body contouring, cellulite care, and skin-tightening support
Applicators
Multiple laser pads for different body areas
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, hips, back, flanks, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 20–40 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 8–12 sessions
Display and Controls
Intelligent touchscreen interface
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
Receives in 7 days.
Professional 15-in-1 Hydra Facial and Skin-Care System
Fifteen Treatment Technologies for Professional Facial Rejuvenation
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System is a multifunctional facial platform developed for beauty salons, professional spas, aesthetic clinics and skin-care studios.
The system combines 15 treatment technologies for deep cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, product infusion, skin firming, acne-care support, pore refinement, brightening and facial rejuvenation.
Its 500W maximum power, 14-inch touchscreen, adjustable vacuum pressure and intelligent software controls provide treatment flexibility for different skin concerns and professional facial protocols.
Fifteen treatment technologies | 14-inch touchscreen | Adjustable vacuum control | Three-year warranty
Fifteen Treatment Technologies on One Professional Platform Hydro Dermabrasion
Hydro dermabrasion combines controlled suction, liquid flow and treatment solutions for professional cleansing and exfoliation. Common applications include: Deep facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Oil and debris removal Skin hydration Pore-care treatments General facial rejuvenation Bubble Pen
The Bubble Pen is designed for purifying and cleansing-focused skin-care protocols. Common applications include: Surface cleansing Congested-looking skin Oily-skin programs Pore-care treatments Facial preparation General skin refinement Bio RF Handle
The Bio RF handle delivers controlled radiofrequency energy for professional firming and rejuvenation programs. Common applications include: Skin-firming support Fine-line appearance Facial rejuvenation Elasticity-focused treatments Mature-skin programs General anti-aging services Three-Pole Bio-Electric Handle
The three-pole bio-electric handle provides controlled stimulation for suitable facial treatment programs. Common applications include: Facial-toning support Skin-conditioning programs Mature-looking skin General rejuvenation Professional facial services Customized beauty protocols Water Oxygen Spray
The Water Oxygen Spray provides a fine liquid mist for hydration and skin-care product application. Common applications include: Skin hydration Cooling and refreshing Facial solution application Post-cleansing care Dull-looking skin General facial wellness PDT Handle
The PDT handle uses selected LED light programs for professional skin-care applications. Common applications include: Anti-aging programs Acne-prone skin care Brightening treatments Calming protocols General skin rejuvenation Post-facial support High-Frequency Handle
The high-frequency handle is designed for suitable professional skin-care and acne-focused protocols. Common applications include: Oily-skin programs Acne-prone skin care Post-extraction support Clarifying treatments Facial skin conditioning General spa services Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber
The ultrasonic scrubber supports professional surface cleansing and exfoliation. Common applications include: Surface exfoliation Pore cleansing Removal of loosened debris Skin-care preparation Texture-refinement programs General facial cleansing Facial Ultrasound
The Facial Ultrasound handle supports professional facial massage and cosmetic-product application. Common applications include: Facial massage Product-application support General rejuvenation Skin-conditioning programs Hydration treatments Professional facial packages Eye Ultrasound
The Eye Ultrasound handle is designed for appropriate professional treatments around suitable eye-area zones. Common applications include: Under-eye skin care Eye-area massage Puffiness-focused programs Fine-line appearance Product-application support Delicate-area facial treatments Exfoliation Handle
The exfoliation handle provides controlled surface polishing for professional skin-refinement services. Common applications include: Gentle exfoliation Uneven-looking texture Surface skin polishing Facial preparation General skin refinement Brightening programs Microneedling Pen
The microneedling pen creates controlled microchannels for professional skin-remodeling programs. Common applications include: Uneven skin texture Fine-line appearance Acne-scar appearance Collagen-remodeling programs Professional rejuvenation Customized facial treatments Diamond Microdermabrasion
The diamond microdermabrasion handle provides controlled mechanical exfoliation using interchangeable diamond tips. Common applications include: Surface exfoliation Rough-looking skin Uneven-looking texture Dull complexion Skin-care preparation Professional polishing treatments Ice Hammer
The Ice Hammer provides controlled cooling for calming and post-treatment comfort. Common applications include: Cooling after facial treatments Temporary redness Skin-comfort programs Pore-care finishing steps Post-extraction support Facial-treatment completion WikBeauty Nutrient Solutions
The system supports compatible WikBeauty solutions for cleansing, moisturizing and revitalizing professional facial protocols. Available solution functions include: Purifying Moisturizing Revitalizing Hydro dermabrasion support Customized facial protocols Professional maintenance care The appropriate technology, settings, products and treatment duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol. Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system supports customizable facial programs using one or more of its 15 technologies. Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Pore Care
A cleansing-focused program for congested, oily or dull-looking skin. Recommended technologies: Hydro dermabrasion Bubble Pen Ultrasonic scrubber High-frequency handle Ice Hammer Recommended for: Congested-looking skin Oily-skin programs Pore-care treatments General facial cleansing Program 2: Hydration and Brightening
A moisture-focused program designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin. Recommended technologies: Hydro dermabrasion Water Oxygen Spray Facial Ultrasound PDT Handle WikBeauty nutrient solutions Recommended for: Dry-looking skin Dull complexion Skin-brightening services Hydration-focused facials Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation program for mature-looking skin, fine lines and firmness concerns. Recommended technologies: Bio RF Handle Three-Pole Bio-Electric Handle Facial Ultrasound Microneedling Pen PDT Handle Recommended for: Mature-looking skin Fine-line appearance Skin-firming programs Professional anti-aging services Program 4: Texture and Skin Renewal
A customized program for uneven-looking texture, surface refinement and suitable scar concerns. Recommended technologies: Diamond Microdermabrasion Exfoliation Handle Microneedling Pen Ultrasonic Scrubber Ice Hammer Recommended for: Uneven-looking texture Rough-looking skin Acne-scar appearance Professional renewal programs Precision Vacuum Control for Customized Facial Treatments
The Hydra Beauty Skin System provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment handle, skin condition, treatment area and client comfort. The intelligent software control provides greater flexibility over suction strength, liquid flow and treatment comfort. New clients should begin with lower vacuum and energy settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Facial Treatment Areas
The 15 treatment technologies support professional treatments for multiple facial and skin areas. Full-Face Treatments
Forehead Cheeks Nose Chin Jawline General facial skin Delicate-Area Treatments
Suitable under-eye areas Outer eye area Upper cheeks Lip-contour area Other professionally assessed zones Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
Neck Décolletage Upper chest Suitable hand areas Other appropriate skin zones Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected handle, products, vacuum pressure, energy settings and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Facial Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, sensitivities and contraindications. The appropriate facial program is then selected. 2. System Preparation
The required treatment handles, tips, bottles and nutrient solutions are installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that all connections are secure. 3. Parameter Selection
Vacuum pressure, RF energy, ultrasound settings, light mode, treatment duration and other available parameters are selected according to the client’s skin condition and professional protocol. 4. Facial Treatment
The operator performs the selected facial steps in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally takes approximately 30–60 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity, tingling or mild swelling may occur, particularly after exfoliation or microneedling treatments. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 15 facial technologies with intelligent touchscreen controls for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Fifteen professional treatment technologies 14-inch touchscreen control Adjustable 0–100KPa vacuum Intelligent suction software Maximum 500W power Multiple treatment handles Four solution bottles Modern floor-standing design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, 15 treatment technologies and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty main unit Hydro Dermabrasion handle Bubble Pen Bio RF Handle Three-Pole Bio-Electric Handle Water Oxygen Spray PDT Handle High-Frequency Handle Ultrasonic Scrubber Facial Ultrasound Handle Eye Ultrasound Handle Exfoliation Handle Microneedling Pen Diamond Microdermabrasion Handle Ice Hammer Four solution bottles Compatible WikBeauty nutrient solutions Power cable English user manual Documentation and Training
English operating manual Personal Zoom or FaceTime training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup instructions Facial-protocol training Vacuum and energy-setting guidance Product and solution guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional training certificate Basic troubleshooting assistance Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides personal professional training to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Operation of all 15 technologies Treatment-handle installation Hydro dermabrasion protocols Vacuum-pressure adjustment RF and ultrasound settings PDT color selection Microneedling operation Client consultation Facial-program creation Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Personal training is available through Zoom or FaceTime. A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Lifetime technical support is included for machine-operation questions and troubleshooting assistance. Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System is supported by a 36-month main-machine warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components 14-inch touchscreen Intelligent vacuum-control system Internal pumps and control components Other eligible main-machine components Individual parts and treatment handles are covered by a 12-month parts warranty. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handle operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of tips, filters and consumables Damage caused by incompatible liquids or products Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images, unboxing video and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment suitability depends on the selected technology. Some functions may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active cancer Active skin infections Open wounds in the treatment area Severe inflammatory skin conditions Recent surgery Recent injectable treatments Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication Recent isotretinoin use Bleeding disorders A history of abnormal or keloid scarring Reduced skin sensation Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Microneedling cartridges must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements. RF energy, ultrasound, vacuum pressure, light intensity and exfoliation strength must be selected according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Skin-care studios Estheticians Facial specialists Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their facial services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty System? Access Fifteen Facial Technologies
One professional platform supports cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, infusion, RF, ultrasound, LED, microneedling and cooling treatments. Create Customized Facial Programs
Practitioners can combine selected technologies to create cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and texture-refinement packages. Receive Professional Training
Personal Zoom or FaceTime training covers machine setup, all 15 technologies, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning and maintenance. Build Professional Credibility
A complimentary professional training certificate is provided after successful completion and can be displayed in the treatment environment. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a 36-month main-machine warranty, 12-month parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system includes Hydro Dermabrasion, Bubble Pen, Bio RF, Three-Pole Bio-Electric, Water Oxygen Spray, PDT, High Frequency, Ultrasonic Scrubber, Facial Ultrasound, Eye Ultrasound, Exfoliation, Microneedling, Diamond Microdermabrasion, Ice Hammer and WikBeauty nutrient solutions. How long does a professional facial take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. Treatment duration depends on the selected technologies, skin concern and customized facial protocol. Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can combine suitable technologies to create cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and texture-refinement programs. Is professional training included?
Yes. Personal Zoom or FaceTime training covers machine setup, touchscreen operation, all 15 technologies, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance and safety. Is a training certificate included?
Yes. A complimentary professional training certificate is provided after successful completion of the training program. What is the adjustable vacuum range?
The Hydro Dermabrasion system provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa. Which skin concerns can be addressed?
The available technologies support professional programs for congestion, dehydration, fine lines, uneven-looking texture, acne-prone skin, dullness, eye-area concerns and general facial rejuvenation. Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Protocols can be customized using lower vacuum, energy and exfoliation settings. Every client still requires a professional skin assessment before treatment. What does the warranty cover?
The main machine includes a 36-month warranty. Individual treatment handles and eligible parts include 12-month coverage, subject to the official warranty policy. Is lifetime technical support included?
Yes. Lifetime technical support is included for operating questions, troubleshooting and equipment guidance. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add a Complete Hydra Facial System to Your Business
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System combines: Fifteen professional treatment technologies A 14-inch touchscreen and adjustable vacuum control Personal professional training and certification Customizable facial and skin-care programs Three-year main-machine warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment technologies, training program and package contents. Order Your 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System and Request Pricing
Vacuum Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Vacuum
Sensitive skin and delicate facial areas
Moderate Vacuum
General hydro dermabrasion and cleansing
Higher Vacuum
Appropriately selected congested or thicker skin areas
Customized Vacuum
Treatment-specific professional facial protocols
Skin Concern
Applicable Technology
Intended Skin-Care Application
Congested-looking skin
Hydro dermabrasion and scrubber
Deep-cleansing support
Dry or dehydrated-looking skin
Hydro dermabrasion and oxygen spray
Hydration-focused care
Fine-line appearance
RF, ultrasound or microneedling
Anti-aging support
Uneven-looking texture
Microdermabrasion or microneedling
Texture-refinement programs
Acne-prone skin
Bubble Pen, PDT or high frequency
Clarifying skin care
Dull-looking complexion
PDT, oxygen spray or solutions
Brightening programs
Eye-area concerns
Eye Ultrasound
Delicate-area skin care
Temporary post-treatment redness
Ice Hammer
Cooling and comfort support
Specification
Details
Product Name
WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System
Product Type
Professional multifunctional facial system
Number of Technologies
15
Maximum Power
500W
Display
14-inch touchscreen
Vacuum Pressure
0–100KPa adjustable
Vacuum Control
Intelligent software-controlled suction
Voltage Options
110V and 220V
Electrical Frequency
50Hz and 60Hz
Machine Dimensions
42 × 52 × 98cm
Machine Weight
40kg
Package Dimensions
110 × 56 × 56cm
Package Weight
45kg
Treatment Handles
15 professional technologies
Solution Bottles
Four
Components
Imported parts from the USA, Germany and Japan
Warranty
36-month main-machine warranty
Parts Warranty
12 months
Support
Lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
Elevate Your Practice
Shop by Treatment
Explore professional-grade machines crafted for every aesthetic and wellness need.
Top Sellers You Can't Miss
From $2,599.00
Receives in 7 days.
From $2,599.00
Receives in 7 days.
$560.00
Receives in 7 days.
$2,169.00
Receives in 7 days.
From $499.00
Receives in 7 days.
$2,499.00
Receives in 7 days.
$3,999.00
Receives in 7 days.
Wait — here's $50 off your order
Looks like you left something behind. Complete your order now and take $50 off with code COMEBACK50 — no minimum purchase required.
- Choosing a selection results in a full page refresh.
- Opens in a new window.